128i Convertible (2011) - Car BMW - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL 128i Convertible (2011) BMW

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

Contents A-Z

Front view of a silver BMW sedan with black grille and license plate (M NK 4592) on the roof, surrounded by trees.

128i Owner's Manual for Vehicle

135i Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the

written consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English II/10, 03 10 500

Printed on environmentally friendly paper,

bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents

The quickest way to find special topics is to consult the index, refer to page 238.

Using this Owner's Manual

4 Notes

7 Reporting safety defects

At a glance

10 Dashboard

16 iDrive

21 Letters and numbers

22 Voice activation system

Controls

26 Opening and closing

43 Adjustments

52 Transporting children safely

55 Driving

68 Controls overview

80 Technology for driving comfort and safety

91 Lamps

96 Climate

101 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips

112 Things to remember when driving

Navigation

120 Navigation system

121 Destination entry

130 Destination guidance

137 What to do if ...

Entertainment

140 On/off and tone

143 Radio

146 Satellite radio

151 CD/DVD player and CD changer

158 Music collection

163 External devices

Communications

170 Telephone

182 Contacts

184 BMW Assist

Mobility

192 Refueling

194 Wheels and tires

202 Under the hood

207 Maintenance

209 Care

213 Replacing components

219 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference

226 Technical data

231 Short commands for the voice activation system

238 Everything from A to Z

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual

We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehicle.

Additional sources of information

Should you have any other questions, your BMW center will be glad to advise you at any time.

Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used

Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Marks the end of a specific item of information.
* Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional accessories, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.
...< Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.
)....( Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components

Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for information on a particular part or assembly.

The individual vehicle

When you ordered your BMW, you chose various items of equipment. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equipment available with a specific BMW model.

Please bear in mind that the manual may contain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equipment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Editorial notice

BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

For your own safety

Maintenance and repair

Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. You should therefore have the corresponding work on your vehicle performed only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and accessories

For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.

BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.

BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.

BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation, or its occupants.

Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers.

Installation and operation of accessories not approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or similar accessories, may cause extensive damage to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-may be performed by any automotive r establishment or individual using any cer-automotive part.

California Proposition 65 warning

California law requires us to issue the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:

▶ New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
▶ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
▶ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone [phone].

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your center, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca

Interior view of a modern car exhibition hall with curved architecture and parked cars (no visible text or signage)

At a glance This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the control concepts and options available for operating the various systems. Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 129 - © 02/10 BMW AG

At a glance

This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.

Dashboard

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

Diagram of a car's steering wheel with numbered labels pointing to various components

1 Convertible: opening and closing windows jointly 36
2 Convertible: opening and closing rear windows 35
3 Opening and closing front windows 35
4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out * 49
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb monitor* 49

6 EDO Parking lamps 91

Low beams 92

Automatic

headlamp control* 91

Adaptive light control* 92

High-beam assistant* 93

7

Fog lamps* 94

8

Turn signals 64

High beams, headlamp flasher 93

High-beam assistant* 93

Roadside parking lamps* 93

Computer 69

Settings and information about the vehicle 71

9 Instrument cluster 12

10

Windshield wipers 65

Rain sensor* 65

11 Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 55

12 Ignition lock 55

13 Buttons on the steering wheel

Telephone*:

Accepting and ending a call; dialing* the selected phone number; redialing if no phone number is selected

Volume

Activating/deactivating the voice activation system*

Changing the radio station Interrupting a traffic bulletin Selecting a music track Scrolling through the redial list

Next entertainment source

Recirculated-air mode 98

14

Steering wheel heating* 51

15 Horn, entire surface

16 Adjusting the steering wheel 51

17

Cruise control* 66

18 Releasing the hood 202

19 Opening the trunk lid 31

Instrument cluster

1 2 3 2 4 1/min x 1000 +74.0 °F 11:15am M4 012345mls 6789 8 1/2 mph km/h DTC ABS BRAKE SERVICE ENGINE SOUND 7 6 5 16 250 340 -°F

1 Speedometer

135i: with fuel gauge

2 Indicator lamps for turn signals

3 Indicator and warning lamps 13

4 Tachometer 68

5 Fuel gauge 69

135i: engine oil temperature 69

6 Display for

Clock 68

Outside temperature 68

Indicator and warning lamps 76

7 Display for

Position of automatic transmission* 57
Gear indicator in 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch* 60
Computer 69
Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 72
Odometer and trip odometer 68
High-beam assistant* 93
▶ Checking the oil level 203
▶ Settings and information 71

8 Resetting the trip odometer 68

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

Front view of a car dashboard with dual gauges and a central touchscreen (no visible text or symbols)

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Text messages

Washer fluid level low! CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages

Details OK Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir. Refill as soon as possible, refer to Owner's Manual.

You can call up more information on the Control Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 76.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.

Indicator lamps without text messages

The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active:

High beams/headlamp flasher 93

Fog lamps* 94

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is regulating the propulsive forces in order to maintain driving stability 82

Canada: parking brake applied 57

Parking brake applied 57

Canada: engine malfunction with adverse effect on emissions 208

Engine malfunction with adverse effect on emissions 208

Around the center console: controls and displays

Diagram of car interior with labeled dashboard controls and vehicle chassis, showing numbered parts from 1 to 21.

1 Coupe: microphone for voice activation system* and for telephone in hands-free mode* Convertible: microphone on steering column

2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request call* 219

3 Reading lamps * 95

4 Coupe: glass roof, electric * 36

5 Interior lamps 95

6 Passenger airbag status lamp 89

7 Control Display 16

8 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 81

9 Hazard warning flashers

10 Central locking system 30

11 Automatic climate control

Air distribution to the windshield 97

Air distribution to the upper body area 97

Air distribution to the footwell 97

Automatic air distribution and flow rate 97

Cooling function 98

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC and recirculated-air mode 98

Maximum cooling 97

ALL program 98

Air volume 98

Defrosting windows 98

Rear window defroster 98

Heated seats* 48

12 CD/DVD drive * 140

13 Selecting AM or FM waveband

14 Changing the audio and entertainment sources

15 Changing

Radio station 143

Track 151

16 Convertible: open convertible top 38 Convertible: close convertible top 38

17 Controller 16 Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four directions

18 Buttons on the controller 17 Selecting menus directly

19 Programmable memory keys 20

20 Switching entertainment audio sources on/off and adjusting volume 140

21 Ejecting a CD/DVD * 151

iDrive

iDrive integrates the functions of a large number of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position. The following section provides an introduction to

basic menu navigation. The control of the individual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.

Controls

Diagram illustrating car interior control panel and adjustment mechanism with numbered steps for device placement

1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons

You can use the buttons to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select the menu items and create settings.

Move in four directions, arrow 3
Turn, arrow 4
▶ Push, arrow 5

Operate the controller only when traffic and road conditions allow this, to avoid endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.

Buttons on the controller

Button Function
MENU Open the main menu
RADIO Open the Radio menu
CD Open the CD/Multimedia menu
NAV Open the Navigation menu
TEL Open the Telephone menu
BACK Display the previous menu
OPTION	Open the Options menu

Operating principle

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, refer to page 55, the following message is displayed on the Control Display:

Attention! Use this system only when traffic conditions permit. Do not rely solely on Driver Assistance systems. Safe vehicle operation is the driver's responsibility. For further info see Owner's Manual. Accept

To hide the message:

Press the controller.

The main menu is displayed.

The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.

Opening the main menu

Press the MENU button.

The main menu is displayed.

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting a menu item

The menu items shown in white can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

1. Press the controller.

A new menu is displayed or the function is executed.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are given in quotation marks, e.g. "Settings".

Changing between panels

After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can overlap.

Move the controller to the left or right to change between the panels.

FM Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96.3 KLASSIK 100.0 MHz 101.3 MHz

White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.

Open the Options menu

Press the OPTION button. The "Options" menu is displayed.

Options Split screen Switch off control display Bayern 1 Store station

Another possibility: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu appears.

The "Options" menu contains the following:

Screen settings, refer to page 19.

▶ Control options for the selected menu.

Adjusting settings

1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting: PDC Gong

1. Press the controller to confirm the setting.

The scroll bar on the right side indicates whether additional menu items or settings can be selected that are currently not visible.

Example: setting the clock

1. Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

1. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Settings ✓ Time/Date Language/Units Tone Speed Climate Lighting Door locks

1. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Time/Date Time: 09:30 Format: 24 h Date: 27.05.2012 Format: tt.mrn.jjjj

1. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.

2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

Status information

1 2 3 4 1:30 pm 12:11 Santana Supernatural 00:08 12/99

1 Time

2 Display for:

▶ Reception strength of the wireless network, depends on the mobile phone
▶ Incoming, outgoing or missed call
▶ SMS received

3 Display for:

Entertainment: Radio, CD/DVD, external devices
Telephone*: Name of the mobile phone paired with the vehicle

4 Sound output is switched off or display for traffic bulletins*:

"TI": Traffic bulletins are switched on.
No display: Traffic bulletins are switched off.

Other displays:

Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or entries via the voice activation system*.

Switching the Control Display off/on

1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Switch off control display"

Options Split screen Switch off control display

Press the controller to switch on.

Professional navigation system: split screen

Additional information, e.g. from the computer, can be displayed on the right side of the split screen.

On the split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Split screen"

The split screen is activated.

Selecting the display for the split screen content

When the split screen is switched on, you can select the content displayed on the screen.

1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen content is selected.
2. Select the display.

Split screen content ✓ Split screen Map facing north Map direction of travel Map view with perspective Position ✓ Onboard info Trip computer

Programmable memory keys

Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the programmable memory keys and called up directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and entry points into the menu.

Storing functions

1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. ... Press the desired button for longer than 2 seconds.

Example for programmable memory keys

Switch the voice instructions for the navigation on/off.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol using the controller.
4. ... Press the desired button for longer than 2 seconds.

Executing a function

... Press the button.

The function is executed immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying memory key assignments

Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

Displaying brief information

1 ... Touch the button.

The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

Displaying detailed information

1 ... Touch the button longer.

Letters and numbers

Entering letters and numbers

1. Turn the controller: select the letters or numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

←	Press the controller: delete one letter or number
←	Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers
└	Enter a blank space

Switching between letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

A^BC	Entering letters
1^2_3	Entering numbers

Wordmatch concept during navigation

Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically.

Destination search: the entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle.

The only letters offered for entering addresses are those for which data are available.

Town/city names can be entered with the spelling used in any of the languages available on the Control Display.

Voice activation system\*

The concept

The voice activation system allows you to control operation of various vehicle systems without removing your hands from the steering wheel.

Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. It is not necessary to use the controller.

The voice activation system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.

The voice activation system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.

Precondition

Via iDrive, select the language in which the voice activation system is operating, so that the spoken commands can be identified. Selecting the language for iDrive, refer to page 79.

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

... Say the specified commands word for word.
»...« Indicates responses of the voice activation system.

Saying commands

Activating voice activation system

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Close-up of a car dashboard with a black triangular button and a small inset showing the Chinese character '电' (electricity) (no other text or symbols visible)

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal indicate that the voice activation system is ready to receive spoken commands.

CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

2. Say the command.

The command appears on the Control Display.

This symbol appears on the Control Display when you can enter additional commands. If no further commands are possible, continue by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice activation system

Press the button on the steering wheel or

Cancel

In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the procedure can only be canceled using the button on the steering wheel.

Possible commands

The commands available in each case depend on the menu item selected on the Control Display.

To have the available commands read aloud:

Voice commands< or >Help<

For example, if "CD" is selected, the commands for operating CD/Multimedia are read aloud.

Calling up functions immediately via short commands

With short commands you can run certain functions directly, regardless of which menu item is selected, refer to page 231.

Example: selecting the track of a CD

1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

1. Select the music track, e.g.:

CD track 4

System says:

Track 4<<

Setting the voice dialog

You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts and responses from the system are abbreviated.

1. "Settings"

2. "Language/Units"

3. "Speech mode:"

Speech mode ✓ Default Short

1. Select a setting:

▷ "Default"
▶ "Short"

Notes

For voice commands, bear in mind the following:

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.
▶ Pronounce the commands and digits smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. This also applies when spelling out and saying a full word during destination entry.
When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name.
Keep doors, windows, and glass sunroof* closed in order to avoid interference from outside noises.
Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

To operate the telephone by voice, refer to page 177.

START STOP ENGINE Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 129 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience, are described here. Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 129 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Controls

This chapter is intended to provide you with information for complete control of your vehicle.

All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.

Opening and closing

Remote control

Close-up of a black BMW car key with a circular logo and side buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Black and white photo of a car with a circular emblem on the side (no visible text or symbols)

Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort Access*, the remote control contains a replaceable battery, refer to page 35.

The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car, refer to Personal Profile, next column.

In addition, information about service requirements is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 207.

Integrated key

Diagram of a car plug with internal components and an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

Driver's door, refer to page 29
Convertible: glove compartment, refer to page 104

New remote controls

Your BMW center can supply new remote controls with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.

Personal Profile

The concept

You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the settings stored for it are called up and implemented.

This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings. The individual settings are stored for a maximum of four remote controls. They are stored for two remote controls if Comfort Access * is in use.

Personal Profile settings

For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.

▶ Programming the Programmable memory keys, refer to page 20
Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked, refer to page 27
▶ Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 30
▶ Automatic call-up* of the driver's seat position, refer to page 48
Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 64

▶ Settings for the display on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster:

12h/24h format of the clock, refer to page 74
Date format, refer to page 76
▶ Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 79
Language of the Control Display, refer to page 79
Units of measure for fuel consumption, distance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 72

Show visual warning for Park Distance Control PDC, refer to page 80

Light settings:

▶ Welcome lamps, refer to page 91
▶ Pathway lighting, refer to page 92
Daytime running lights, refer to page 92
▶ High-beam assistant*, refer to page 93

Automatic climate control: activating/deactivating AUTO program, cooling function and automatic recirculated-air control, setting temperature, air volume and distribution, refer to page 97 ff

Entertainment:

▶ Tone control, refer to page 140
▶ Speed-dependent volume control, refer to page 140

Central locking system

The concept

The central locking system functions when the driver's door is closed.

The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:

Doors
Trunk lid
▶ Fuel filler flap

Operating from outside

Via the remote control
Via the door lock*
In cars with Comfort Access*, via the handles on the driver's and front passenger doors

In addition, if the remote control is used, the welcome lamps ^ , interior lamps and the door's courtesy lamps ^ are switched on or off. The alarm system ^* is also armed or disarmed.

For further details on the alarm system *, refer to page 32.

Operating from inside

By means of the button for central locking, refer to page 30.

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing: Using the remote control

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.

Convertible: to operate the convertible top with the remote control, the doors and trunk lid must be closed and the cargo area partition must be folded down and engaged on both sides. Refer also to page 40.

Unlocking

Press the button.

The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps* and the welcome lamps come on.

Setting unlocking characteristics

You can set whether only the driver's door or the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the button is pressed for the first time.

1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"

Door locks Unlock button: All doors □ Last seat position auto. □ Lock if no door is opened □ Lock after start. to drive □ Flash when lock/unlock

1. Select a menu item:

"All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.
"Driver's door only" Pressing the button once unlocks the driver's door and fuel filler flap. Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.

1. Press the controller.

Coupe: convenient opening

Hold the button down. The windows and the glass roof* are opened.

Convertible: convenient opening\*

When you are close to the vehicle, the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to open the convertible top and windows.

Hold the button down. The windows and the convertible top are opened provided that the doors are closed.

If you continue pressing the button, the windows move up.

Watch during the opening process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing the button interrupts the opening process.

Locking

Press the button.

Convertible: convenient closing\*

When you are close to the vehicle, the remote control for Comfort Access can be used to close the convertible top and windows.

Hold the button down. The convertible top and the windows are closed.

Watch during the closing process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing the button interrupts the closing process.

Switching on interior lamps

While the car is locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.

Unlocking the trunk lid

Press the button for a longer period.

The trunk lid opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.

The trunk lid swings backward and up when opened. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance.

To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do not place the remote control in the cargo area. A previously locked trunk lid is locked again after closing.

Before and after each trip, check that the trunk lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.

Confirmation signals

You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.

1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"

3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

Door locks Unlock button: All doors □ Last seat position auto. □ Lock if no door is opened □ Lock after start. to drive □ Flash when lock/unlock

4. Press the controller.

RV Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehicle is switched on.

Malfunctions

The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.

Coupe: in vehicles without an alarm system* or Comfort Access*, only the driver's door can be unlocked and locked using the integrated key in the door lock.

If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is discharged. Use the remote control on an extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to page 26. The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that may have to be changed, refer to page 35.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:

FCC ID:

LX8766S

LX8766E

LX8CAS

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device must not cause harmful interference, and

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Opening and closing: Using the door lock

Diagram of a car door handle with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

You can set the way in which the car is unlocked, refer to page 27.

Coupe

In vehicles without an alarm system* or Comfort Access*, only the driver's door can be locked via the door lock.

To lock both doors, the fuel filler flap and the trunk lid together:

1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle using the button for the central locking system in the interior, refer to page 30.

2. Unlock and open the driver's or front passenger door, refer to page 30.

3. Lock the vehicle.

Lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock, or
press down the lock button of the front passenger door and close the door from the outside.

Convenient operation\*

Coupe: if the vehicle is equipped with an alarm system* or Comfort Access*, you can also operate the windows and glass roof * via the door lock.

Convertible: you can operate the windows and convertible top via the door lock.

Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.

During each closing procedure, and when opening the convertible top, watch the process and ensure that no one becomes trapped. Releasing the key stops the operation.

Manual operation

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the integrated key to the corresponding limit positions in the door lock.

Opening and closing: From inside

Interior view of a car air conditioner unit showing airflow control panel and file icon (no text or symbols)

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the trunk lid, but does not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Automatic locking

You can also set the situations in which the car locks:

1. "Settings"

2. "Door locks"

3. Select the desired function:

"Lock if no door is opened" The central locking system locks after a short time if no door has been opened.

"Lock after start. to drive" The central locking system locks the vehicle as soon as you start to drive.

Door locks Unlock button: All doors Last seat position auto. Lock if no door is opened Lock after start. to drive Flash when lock/unlock

The function is switched on and is stored he remote control currently in use.

Unlocking and opening doors

Either unlock the doors together using the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or
pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.

Locking

Use the central locking button to lock all of the doors simultaneously, or
press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.

Trunk lid

In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the lid.

Opening from inside

Close-up of a car interior with a tool interacting with the window, showing a car icon and partial view of the engine (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button: the trunk lid opens unless it has been locked.

Opening from outside

Side view of a car's rear bumper with visible grille and side door (no text or symbols)

Press the button, see arrow, or the button on the remote control for a longer period. The trunk lid opens slightly and can be swung upward.

In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that

works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Locking or unlocking separately

Close-up of a car interior showing a tool interacting with a door panel, with an inset highlighting the door panel (no text or symbols visible)

The switch is located in the glove compartment.

1 Locking the trunk lid

2 Unlocking the trunk lid

Locking separately

Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.

The trunk lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system.

If you give the remote control without the integrated key to someone else while the glove compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be opened. This is an advantage when valet parking, for example. Locking the glove compartment, refer to page 104.

Unlocking separately

Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.

Emergency release

Simple triangular warning symbol with a downward arrow inside, no text or numbers present

Pull the lever in the cargo area. The trunk lid is unlocked.

Closing

Top-down view of a transparent plastic car rear bumper with mounting holes and a central display (no text or symbols visible)

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down.

Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Alarm system\*

The concept

The vehicle alarm system responds:

When a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened
To movements inside the vehicle: interior motion sensor, refer to page 33
When the car's inclination changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away: tilt alarm sensor, refer to page 33
When there has been an interruption of power supply from the battery

Depending on the market-specific version, the alarm system briefly signals unauthorized entry attempts by:

An acoustic alarm
Switching on* the hazard warning flashers

Arming and disarming

When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

You can open the trunk lid using the button of the remote control even if the alarm system is armed, refer to page 28. The lid is locked and monitored again as soon as it is closed.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button for at least three seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Switching off an alarm

Unlock the car with the remote control, refer to page 27, or
▶ insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Indicator lamp displays

Close-up of a ceiling-mounted fixture with a circular vent and screw base (no visible text or symbols)

The indicator lamp under the inside rearview mirror flashes continuously: the system is armed.
The indicator lamp flashes after locking: doors, hood or trunk lid are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to monitor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.
The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.
If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle.

Interior motion sensor

Coupe

In order for the interior motion sensor to function properly, the windows and glass roof must be completely closed *.

Convertible

The interior of the car is monitored up to the height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm system is activated together with the interior motion sensor even if the convertible top is open. An alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

In duplex garages
During transport on car-carrying trains, boats/ships or on a trailer
When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.

Comfort Access\*

Comfort Access enables you to enter your vehicle without needing to hold the remote control in your hand. All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corresponding remote control within the immediate vicinity or in the passenger compartment.

Comfort Access supports the following functions:

▶ Unlocking/locking the vehicle
▶ Unlocking the trunk lid separately
▶ Engine starting
▶ Convenient closing

Functional requirement

The vehicle or the trunk lid can only be locked when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is outside of the vehicle.
The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx. 2 seconds.
The engine can only be started when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is inside the vehicle.

Comparison to the standard remote control

In general, there is no difference between using Comfort Access or pressing the buttons on the remote control to carry out the functions mentioned above. You should therefore first familiarize yourself with the instructions on opening and closing starting on page 26.

Special features regarding the use of Comfort Access are described below.

If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing windows, the glass roof or the convertible top, the system is checking whether a remote control is inside the vehicle. Please repeat the opening or closing procedure, if necessary.

Unlocking

Diagram showing a car with two directional arrows labeled 1 and 2 pointing to the side of the car.

Grasp the handle on the driver's or front passenger door completely, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the button.

Locking

Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the 🔒 LOCK button.

To preserve the battery, please make sure that the ignition and all electrical consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.

Coupe: convenient closing

For Convenient closing, keep your finger on the surface, arrow 2.

Convertible: window and convertible top operation

With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, you can open and close the windows and the convertible top when a remote control is located inside the vehicle.

Unlocking the trunk lid separately

Press the button on the outside of the trunk lid. This corresponds to pressing the button.

If the vehicle detects that a remote control has been accidentally left inside the locked vehicle after the trunk lid is closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers flash and a signal* sounds.

Switching on radio readiness

Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the start/stop button, refer to page 55.

Do not depress the brake or the clutch; otherwise, the engine will start immediately.

Starting the engine

You can start the engine or switch on the ignition when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition lock, refer to page 55.

Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission

The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, refer to page 56. To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition lock.

Malfunctions

Comfort Access may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this happens, open and close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or using the integrated key. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition lock.

Warning lamps

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot

be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition lock.

The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no

longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display:

replace the battery in the remote control.

Replacing the battery

The remote control for Comfort Access contains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.

1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 26.

3D illustration of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating a process or movement (no text or symbols present)

1. Remove the cover.
2. Insert the new battery with the plus side facing up.
3. Press the cover on to close.

Take the old battery to a battery collection point or to your BMW center.

Windows

To prevent injuries, watch the windows while closing them.

Take the remote control out of the ignition when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure themselves.

Coupe: opening, closing

Close-up of a medical or laboratory instrument with a magnified inset showing internal components (no visible text or symbols)

Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.

Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

Convertible: opening, closing

Window operation with Comfort Access, refer also to page 28.

To close the side windows while driving, either close the rear windows first or all four windows together; otherwise, the windows may not close tightly at high speeds.

Individually

Close-up of a medical or laboratory instrument with a pipette and a close-up inset showing internal components (no visible text or symbols)

Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.
Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot be closed automatically.

Jointly

Close-up of a metallic tool with a magnified inset showing internal components (no visible text or symbols)

Press the switch to the resistance point: All windows open as long as you press the switch.
Press the switch beyond the resistance point:
All windows open automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
▶ Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull the switch.

After switching off the ignition

When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.

Convenient operation

For information on Convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 27 or 30. For information on Convenient closing with Comfort Access, refer to Locking on page 34.

Pinch protection system

If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a power window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the window's travel path prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing.

Do not install any accessories that might interfere with window movement. Otherwise, the pinch protection system could be impaired. Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them closely when closing to avoid personal injury.

Closing without pinch protection

If there is an external danger, or if ice on the windows, etc., prevents you from closing the windows normally, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protection.

Coupe: glass roof\*, electric

To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof while closing it.

Take the remote control with you when you leave the car; otherwise, children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.

Interior view of a car showing a cable connector inserted into a device (no visible text or symbols)

Raising

Press the switch.

The closed glass roof is raised and the sliding visor opens slightly.

Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with the roof in the raised position, as this

would damage the mechanism.

Opening, closing

Press the switch backwards to the resistance point.

The glass roof and the sliding visor open together as long as you hold the switch in this position.

Press the switch backwards past the resistance point.

The glass roof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly press the switch again to stop the opening movement.

You can close the glass roof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand.

For information on Convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 27 or 30. For information on Convenient closing with Comfort Access, refer to Locking on page 34.

After switching off the ignition

When the remote control is removed or the ignition is switched off, you can still operate the roof for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system

If the glass roof encounters an obstruction during closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or during closing from the raised position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass roof is opened again slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the roof's travel path prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the roof would continue closing.

Closing without pinch protection

If there is an external danger, press the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it there. The roof closes without pinch protection.

Following interruptions in electrical power supply

After a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass roof can only be raised. The system must be initialized. BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW center.

Closing manually\*

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass roof manually:

1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior lamps using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 213.

Top-down view of a car's rearview mirror and vent, showing sensor placement (no text or symbols)

1. On both sides, use the screwdriver to press on the clip inside the opening.

Close-up of a car rear panel with screwdriver inserted, showing internal components and cable insertion (no text or symbols visible)

1. Remove the control unit.

2. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort will be required for manual operation.

Close-up of a mechanical component with an inset showing a close-up of a cable or connector (no visible text or symbols)

1. Insert the Allen wrench * supplied with the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 213, into the opening provided. Move the glass roof in the desired direction.

Close-up of a mechanical bracket with a curved metal rod inserted, mounted on a vehicle (no visible text or symbols)

1. Reattach the lamp cover and reinstall the control unit.

Convertible: top

The fully automatic top combines reliable weather protection with simple and easy-to-use operation.

The following tips will enhance your driving pleasure in your Convertible:

It is advisable that you close the convertible top when you park the vehicle. Not only does the closed top protect the vehicle interior against unanticipated weather damage, it also offers a certain amount of theft protection. However, even when the top is closed, valuables should only be stored in the locked cargo area.
Do not attach roof-mounted luggage systems to the convertible top.
If the top is opened while it is wet, e.g. after driving in the rain, water may drip into the cargo area. If necessary, remove items from the cargo area beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.

At temperatures below +14 °F / -10 °C, do not move the convertible top as this could result in damage.

Do not keep the convertible top in the convertible top box for longer than one day if it is wet; otherwise, the moisture may cause damage. Do not place objects on the convertible top, as otherwise they may fall off when you operate

the convertible top and cause damage or injury. Never move the convertible top when the roll-over protection system is in the activated position.

Always fully complete a convertible top movement. Driving with the convertible top incompletely opened or closed can result in damage or injury.

Do not reach into the mechanism during the opening or closing procedure. Keep children away from the opening/closing path of the convertible top.

For safety reasons, only move the convertible top when the vehicle is stationary, if possible.

The convertible top swings upward when opening and closing. When operating the convertible top in a garage, under a bridge, etc., ensure that there are at least 6 ft 7 in/2 m of headroom; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Before opening and closing

Comply with the safety precautions described above.
▶ Ensure that the cargo area partition is folded down and engaged on both sides, refer to page 107; otherwise, it will not be possible to open the convertible top.
▶ Ensure that the cargo does not press against the cargo area partition from below.
▶ Ensure that the trunk lid is closed.

Opening and closing

Convertible top operation with Comfort Access, refer also to page 28.

As of radio readiness, refer to page 55:

If possible, conserve the battery by only operating the convertible top when the engine is running.

Before closing the convertible top, remove all foreign objects from the windshield frame as these could prevent the hardtop from closing properly.

Car infotainment panel with labeled buttons and a pointing button, showing vehicle status indicators

1 Push button: close convertible top

2 Push button: open convertible top

3 LEDs

The side windows move down when the convertible top is opened.

Operation while driving

You can open or close the convertible top while driving, as long as the car is not moving faster than approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

If you accelerate to over 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible top is moving, the procedure is interrupted.

When operating the convertible top while driving, pay extra attention to the traffic to avoid an accident. If possible, do not move the convertible top while driving in reverse gear, because your view to the rear is severely limited during the procedure. Do not operate the convertible top while driving in windy conditions.

Do not drive faster than 30 mph/50 km/h; otherwise, damage to the vehicle can occur.

LEDs

While the convertible top is being operated, the left LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as the top is fully opened or closed.

In the following situations, a message appears on the Control Display or an acoustic signal sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:

If the right-hand LED flashes red when you release the button, the opening or closing action has not yet finished.

If the right-hand LED lights up red when the button is pressed, the cargo area partition is raised, the trunk lid is not closed or there is a malfunction. The convertible top cannot be moved.

Interruption

The automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the button for the convertible top operation is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pushing or pulling the buttons.

If the opening or closing procedure is interrupted for an extended period, the convertible top remains in the raised position for approx. 10 minutes and then slowly moves to a stable position.

A convertible top that is not fully opened or closed is a safety hazard.

If the convertible top is not fully opened or closed, the trunk lid cannot be opened the windows cannot be moved.

Convenient operation with remote control or via door lock

Refer to pages 28 and 30.

Closing manually

Only close the convertible top manually if it is absolutely necessary, and never open

it manually. The convertible top box cover cannot be locked if there is an electrical defect and would then open while the vehicle is in motion. Incorrect handling can result in damage.

Closing the convertible top manually should be performed by two people. The rear seats must not be occupied.

Before closing

1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Take the screwdriver out of the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 213.

Top-down view of a car backrest with two directional arrows pointing to the rear side (no text or symbols present)

1. If the convertible top is locked, release the two button in the cargo area, arrows 1, using the screwdriver and pull forcefully all the way out. The convertible top box cover is unlocked.
2. Close the trunk lid. After manually releasing the convertible top box cover, it is no longer possible to open the trunk lid.

Closing

1. Slide the protective cap, arrow 2, forward.
2. Slowly and smoothly open the convertible top box cover all the way, arrow 3.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols present)

1. The locking pins must have engaged completely. If they are still visible: close the convertible top box cover as far as necessary until the locking bolts engage audibly, then slowly open the cover. During this process, do not close the convertible top box cover completely.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a crosshair overlay (no visible text or symbols)

1. Lift out the front part of the convertible top, arrows 4, on both sides and swing it forward. At the same time keep the convertible top box cover from closing, e.g. using your shoulder.

Close-up of a car interior showing a seatbelt cover and a numbered component (no visible text or symbols)

1. Position the rear convertible top frame upright, arrow 5, and close the convertible top box cover, arrow 6. Then lower the rear convertible top frame.

Diagram showing a mechanical or structural component with labeled parts 5 and 6, likely illustrating a part assembly or inspection.

1. Together with another person, press down the front convertible top frame from the outside and on both sides as far as possible.

2. Carefully remove the cover in the center of the front convertible top frame using a pointed object.
   Take the Allen wrench out of the onboard literature pouch.

3. Attach the handle of the screwdriver to the Allen wrench and insert the wrench into the opening provided.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a tool inserted into the neck area, no visible text or symbols

1. Turn the Allen wrench all the way to the left, arrow 7, until the front convertible top frame is locked to the windshield frame. The rear convertible top frame is automatically pressed down onto the convertible top box cover and is sealed tight under tension.

The closing procedure must be fully completed; otherwise, injury or damage may occur.

Please contact your BMW center to have the cause of the malfunction eliminated.

Wind deflector\*

The wind deflector keeps air currents in the passenger compartment at a low level when the convertible top is down and provides for an even more pleasant journey at higher speeds.

Installation

1. Remove the wind deflector from the protective cover and unfold it, arrows 1.

Diagram illustrating the folding of a propeller blade, with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating folding.

1. Press together the top and bottom parts of the wind deflector until the catch engages, arrow 2.

2. Position both locking pins of one side at the openings provided for them.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or navigation (no text or symbols present)

1. Press the wind deflector into the openings, arrows 3, overcoming the tension in the springs, and push the free locking pin in the same direction, arrow 4.

2. Position the free locking pins at the corresponding openings and let the spring tension lock the wind deflector in place, arrow 5.

Interior view of a car showing a black battery cover with labeled parts (no text or symbols beyond numbers)

1. Fold up the top section of the wind deflector, arrow 6.

With the wind deflector installed: do not recline the front-seat backrests too far if the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this would damage the wind deflector.

Removing the wind deflector

Proceed in the reverse order as used for installation.

Folding

Mechanical component diagram showing a lever mechanism with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Slide the red release lever towards the middle of the wind deflector and push the two halves apart.

Adjustments

Sitting safely

The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In conjunction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.

For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 52.

Airbags

Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off.

No one and nothing should come between the airbags and the seat occupant.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag deploys.

Make sure that passengers keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not lean against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise, serious injuries can result if the airbag deploys.

Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 88.

Head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Othe, there is an increased risk of injury in the t of an accident.

Head restraints, refer to page 46.

Safety belt

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen.

The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or fragile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it sits as snugly as possible against the lap and shoulder without being twisted. Otherwise, the belt could slide over your hips and injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut; otherwise, its restraining effect could be impaired.

Safety belts, refer to page 49.

Seats

Note before adjusting

Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a danger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.

Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 46, and on damaged safety belts on page 49.

Manual adjustment

Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per-protection.

Diagram showing vehicle seat positioning with numbered arrows and directional arrows indicating movement or movement.

Longitudinal direction

Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position.

After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages properly.

Height

Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Backrest

Diagram showing a car interior with directional arrows and a numbered arrow labeled '3' (no text or symbols beyond arrows)

Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-rest or lift it off, as necessary.

Tilt*

Top-down view of a car's side panel with a small black sensor device and directional arrows indicating vertical alignment (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.

Thigh support*

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever and move the thigh support forward or back.

Electrical adjustment\*

Observe the adjustment instructions above to ensure the best possible per-

sonal protection.

Diagram showing a device with labeled parts and directional arrows, likely illustrating a mechanical or electrical component.

1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle

Close-up of a spoon cleaning a car interior with a magnified view of the dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

4 Backrest

The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer to Head restraints on page 46.

Lumbar support\*

Close-up of a car dashboard with a tool and a circular control knob (no visible text or symbols)

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

Increase or decrease curvature: press the switch at the front or rear, respectively.
Shift curvature up or down: press the switch at the top or bottom, respectively.

Backrest width\*

Close-up of a medical device with a close-up inset showing a circular button (no text or symbols visible)

You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lateral-support pads.

Press the front or rear end of the switch. Backrest width decreases or increases accordingly.

1 2

To move the front seats forward or backward from outside or from one of the rear seats: with the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end 2 of the switch.

Head restraints

Correctly adjusted head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Reinstall the head restraint before transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise, the passenger will be without protection from the head restraint.

Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Distance

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Front seats

Height adjustment

Diagram of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

To raise: pull up.

To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Removing

1. Pull it up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.

Rear seats

Coupe: height adjustment

Diagram of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

To raise: pull up.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.

Convertible: raising and lowering

Only lower the head restraints if there are no passengers in the rear. Raise all lowered head restraints before transporting passengers in the rear.

Diagram showing car seatbelt with numbered arrow and checkmark indicating left side of seatbelt

To raise: pull up.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down, arrow 2.

Removing

1. Pull it up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.

Coupe: folding head restraint down and up*

Mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion or rotation (no text or symbols)

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, it may contain foldable head restraints.

Folding down:

Press the button, arrow 1.

Folding up:

Pull the head restraint.

Only fold down the head restraints if there

are no passengers in the rear. Fold up the

head restraints again before transporting passengers in the rear.

Seat with manual longitudinal adjustment

Interior view of a car showing the side panel with a highlighted grip and a numbered arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

Easy entry

The easy entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and back-rest angle.

1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Push the seat forward.

Previous positions

Push the seat backward and swing the backrest back.

When pushing the seat into its rearmost position, make sure that no one is injured that no objects are damaged.

Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.

Seat with electrical longitudinal adjustment

Diagram of car seatbelt mechanism with numbered parts and directional arrow indicating rotation

Easy entry

The easy entry feature includes a memory function for the longitudinal adjustment and back-rest angle.

1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the seat has moved into the desired position.

Previous position

Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat automatically stops in its previous position, and fold the backrest back. If you release the switch before the previous seat position is reached, the seat will stop at its current position.

When sliding the seat backward, make sure no one is injured and no objects are aged.

Before driving off, engage both seats and backrests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.

Heated seats\*

Interior view of a car dashboard with two control panels and a close-up inset showing two buttons (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button once per temperature level. Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.

To switch off:

Press button longer.

If you continue driving within approx.

15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.

The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to save on battery power. The LEDs stay lit.

Seat and mirror memory\*

You can store and call up two different combinations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror positions.

Settings for the backrest width and lumbar support are not stored in memory.

Storing

MEMORY 1 2

1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, refer to page 55.

2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.

3. Press the button.

The LED in the button lights up.

1. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the LED goes out.

Call-up

Do not call up the memory while you are driving; otherwise, unexpected seat

movement could result in an accident.

Comfort function

1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch on radio readiness, refer to page 55.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Safety feature

1. Close the driver's door and switch the ignition on or off, refer to page 55.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and keep it pressed until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the button was pressed accidentally: Press the button again; the LED goes out.

Call-up with the remote control

The driver's seat position last set is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can select whether or not the seat is reset to that position automatically.

When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell

behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.

Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.

The adjusting procedure is halted when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.

Selecting automatic call-up

1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."

Door locks Unlock button: All doors Last seat position auto. Lock if no door is opened Lock after start. to drive Flash when lock/unlock

The function for automatically calling up the last seat position is switched on and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Switching off automatic call-up

Deactivate "Last seat position automatic".

Safety belts

Observe the adjustment instructions on page 43 to ensure the best possible personal protection.

Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with visible seat brackets and side gear (no text or symbols)

Closing

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted properly, refer to page 44.

Opening

1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.

"Fasten safety belts" reminder for front seats

The indicator lamps light up and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display. Check whether the safety belt has been fastened correctly.

The "Fasten safety belts" reminder is issued as long as the driver's safety belt has not been fastened. The "Fasten safety belts" reminder is also issued above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h if the front passenger safety belt has not been fastened, if there are objects on the front passenger seat or if the driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.

Damage to safety belts

If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the belt system, including any belt tensioners or child restraint systems, replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work done only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is not guaranteed that the safety devices will function properly.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

The front passenger's mirror is more convex than the driver's mirror. The objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an accident.

Diagram showing a pipette tip interacting with a small object, with three labeled parts (1, 2, 3) and an inset view of the tip.

1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic curb monitor*
3 Folding mirrors in and out *

The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for the remote control currently in use*. The stored position is called up automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.

Manual adjustment

The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.

Folding mirrors in and out\*

At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in narrow streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions. Mirrors that have been folded in fold out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating

Depending on the outside temperature, both exterior mirrors are heated automatically when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Passenger-side mirror tilt function – automatic curb monitor\*

Activating

1. Push the switch to the position for the driver's side mirror, arrow 1.

Close-up of a thermometer with an inset showing two directional arrows labeled 1 and 2 (no text or symbols on the thermometer itself)

1. Shift into reverse or move the selector lever into the R position.

The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into a parking space.

Deactivating

Push the switch to the position for the passenger-side mirror, arrow 2.

Interior rearview mirror

Diagram of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating motion or force (no text or symbols)

Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head-lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature\*

Simple line drawing of a sink with an arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols)

The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors* is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.

In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.

Steering wheel

Adjustments

Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion; otherwise, there

is a risk of an accident due to unexpected movement.

Abstract grayscale image with a vertical arrow and horizontal bars, no visible text or symbols

1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated position.
3. Swing the lever back up.

Do not use force to swing the lever back up; otherwise, the mechanism is damaged.

Steering wheel heating*

Interior view of a car showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Press the button.

The LED in the button lights up when the steering wheel heating is switched on.

Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.

Children always in the rear

Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.

Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only in the rear in suitable child restraint systems appropriate for their age, weight and size. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Children 13 years of age or older must be buckled in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.

Children in the front passenger seat

Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front and side airbags for the front passenger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child traveling on that seat will face a significant risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even with a child restraint system.

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 88.

Installing child restraint systems

Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions when selecting, installing and using child restraint systems.

Otherwise, the protective effect may be diminished.

Standard child restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly or improperly installed child restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children. Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care.

On the front passenger seat

After installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front and side airbags for the front passenger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.

Seat position

Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back and up as possible to obtain the best possible position for the belt. Do not change the seat position after this.

Backrest width\*

The backrest width of the front passenger seat must be at its widest possible setting. Do not change the setting after installing the child seat. Otherwise, the child seat's stability on the front passenger seat is limited.

1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest setting, refer to page 45.

2. Install the child seat.

Child seat security

Interior view of a car seatbelt with visible seat and seat number (no text or symbols)

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child restraint systems.

To lock the safety belt

1. Secure the child restraint system with the belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child restraint system.
   The safety belt is locked.

To unlock the safety belt

1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.

LATCH child restraint fixing system

LATCH: lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.

To install and use the LATCH child restraint system, follow the operating and safety instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child restraint fixing system. Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors are correctly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting firmly against the backrest; otherwise, the protective function of the seat may be compromised.

Coupe: rear seats

Close-up of a medical procedure in progress with a magnified inset showing a fetus inside (no text or symbols visible)

The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protective caps.

Convertible: rear seats

Diagram showing directional arrows pointing to a vehicle or road surface with no visible text or symbols

The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows, in the gap between the seat and the backrest.

Upper LATCH retaining strap

Convertible

For Canadian Customers Only.

The following statement is required by Transport Canada.

This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready tether anchorages. As such neither a child restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requiring the use of a tether strap can be properly secured in the vehicle.

Coupe

Use the top tether anchors to secure child restraint systems only; otherwise, theors could be damaged.

Top-down view of a car backrest with two black directional arrows pointing to the rear seats (no text or symbols present)

For child restraint systems with tether straps there are two additional anchors, see arrows.

Placement of the tether strap

Coupe

Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not

twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Otherwise, the strap will not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an accident.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint system

If necessary, fold the head restraints upward before use.

1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.

Driving

Ignition lock

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock

Abstract digital interface with a central device and upward arrow icon (no readable text or symbols)

Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

Radio readiness is switched on. Individual electrical consumers can operate.

Comfort Access\*

If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock under special circumstances, refer to page 33.

Removing the remote control from the ignition lock

Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause ge.

Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism.

The ignition is switched off if it was on.

Automatic transmission

You cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.

Start/stop button

Close-up of a hand holding a button with a downward arrow, surrounded by industrial equipment (no visible text or symbols)

Pressing the start/stop button switches radio readiness or the ignition on or off.

Manual transmission If you press the start/stop button and depress the clutch, the engine starts.

Automatic transmission and Sports automatic transmission with double clutch: if you press the start/stop button and depress the brake pedal, the engine starts.

Radio readiness

Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is switched off automatically:

When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock
In cars with Comfort Access*, by touching the surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 34

Ignition on

All electrical consumers can operate. The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.

When the engine is off, please switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electrical consumers in order to preserve the battery.

Radio readiness and ignition off

All indicator and warning lamps as well as displays in the instrument cluster go out.

Starting the engine

Do not run the engine in enclosed areas; otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust gases can cause loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the car with the engine running, place the transmission in neutral or move the selector lever to position P and forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the car from moving.

Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

Avoid frequent starting in quick succession as well as repeated start attempts in which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a downward arrow and circular feature, no visible text or symbols

Manual transmission

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 33.

1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift to neutral position.
3. Press the start/stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Automatic transmission

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 33.

1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the start/stop button.

The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.

Sports automatic transmission with double clutch

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 33.

1. Depress the brake.
2. Press the start/stop button.

The engine starts independent of the current transmission position.

Switching off the engine

Always take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle.

When parking, apply the parking brake forcefully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.

Manual transmission

1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 55.

Automatic transmission

1. With the car at a standstill, move the selector lever to position P.

2. Press the start/stop button.

3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.

4. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 55.

Sports automatic transmission with double clutch

1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/stop button. If the transmission is shifted into N when the engine is switched off, you will be notified visually and acoustically of this fact.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
3. Remove remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 55. The transmission is automatically shifted into transmission position P.

Parking brake

The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp

The indicator lamp is lit, and when you drive off a signal sounds in addition. The parking brake is still applied.

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Applying

The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Close-up of a hand holding a pen with a small inset image, pointing to a device component (no visible text or symbols)

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.

In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, continuously press the button of the parking brake lever.

Otherwise, excessive force on the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve.

To prevent corrosion and one-sided braking action, occasionally apply the parking brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.

The brake lamps do not light up when the parking brake is applied.

Manual transmission

R 1 3 5 2 4 6

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged if you inadvertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.

Reverse gear

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.

Automatic transmission with Steptronic\*

In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 59.

Vehicle parking

To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the ring brake before leaving the vehicle with engine running.

Disengaging the remote control

In order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 55.

Selector lever positions

PRNDM/S+−

Displays in the instrument cluster

11:15 am +74.0 V M4 012345 mHz 6789

The selector lever position is displayed and, in manual mode, the engaged gear, e.g. M4.

Changing selector lever positions

With the ignition switched on or the engine running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P.
Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise, the selector lever will be prevented from moving: shiftlock.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, depress the brake until you are ready to start.

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a black arrow pointing to the handle (no text or symbols visible)

A lock prevents you from inadvertently engaging selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.

P Park

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are locked.

R Reverse

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral

You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.

D Drive, automatic position

Position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are selected automatically.

Under normal operating conditions, fuel consumption is lowest when you are driving in position D.

Kickdown

Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum performance.

Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-throttle resistance point.

Sport program and manual operation M/S

Close-up of a car gear shift lever mechanism with a directional arrow (no text or symbols visible)

Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot; the Sport program is activated. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style.

DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.

To deactivate the sport program or manual mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right into position D.

Shifting gears via the selector lever

Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot:

When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear.

The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.

The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed again by the gear actually in use.

Shifting gears via shift paddles\* on the steering wheel

The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.
If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.

If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, speedometer, and BMW logo (no text or symbols visible)

To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.
To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle –.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.

The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed again by the gear actually in use.

Overriding selector lever lock

If the selector lever will not move out of position P even though the ignition is switched on, the brake is depressed, and the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a tool interacting with a small inset image showing a downward arrow (no text or symbols visible)

1. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 213, press the red lever, see arrow, while moving the selector lever to the desired position.

7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch\*

The concept

The 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch is an automated manual transmission with two clutches and secondary gear sets in which the clutching and shifting is handled by an electrohydraulic system.

With the 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch, the gears are shifted without an interruption in driving power.

You operate the 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch using the selector lever and two shift paddles on the steering wheel.

It offers you the following functions:

▶ either manual or automatic mode: sequential mode or drive mode
▶ automatic downshifting and protection against incorrect gear selection, even in sequential mode
▶ Acceleration assistant, Launch Control, refer to page 64.

System limitations

The 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch has an overheating protection that protects the clutch from extreme loads.

The indicator lamp lights up in yellow if the transmission becomes to warm.

Avoid high engine loads and frequent accelerations from zero. If the transmission is overheated, the indicator lamp lights up in red and the power flow to the motor is interrupted. It is only possible to continue driving once the transmission has cooled down.

Avoid frequent powerful accelerations from zero and do not ride the clutch by accelerating slightly with a slipping clutch; otherwise, the transmission may overheat.

Selector lever positions

PRNDM/S + -

11:15am +74.0V M4 012345m/s 6789

The selector lever position and the engaged gear are displayed, e.g. M4.

Engaging selector lever positions

The selector lever can be moved out of position P only with the engine running: interlock.
Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise, the desired shift will not be executed: shiftlock.

Shifting into N, D, R

R N P 1 N D

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, overcoming a resistance point if necessary. When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously press the button 1

The engaged selector lever position is also displayed on the selector lever.

As soon as you release the selector lever, it returns to the center position.

Shifting into P

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a black knob and arrow pointing to the handle (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button P.

P Park

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

The transmission is shifted into P if, with the engine running, you open the driver's door, do not have your safety belt fastened, and subsequently actuate neither the brake pedal nor the accelerator.

The transmission is shifted into P as soon as you switch off the engine, unless the transmission is in N and the remote control is in the ignition lock, refer to page 55. As soon as you remove the remote control from the ignition lock, then the transmission is shifted into P.

R Reverse

Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.

N idle position

You can select this at a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.

After the engine is switched off, the transmission remains in N if you leave the remote control in the ignition lock. You can use this function at a car wash, for example, refer to page 210.

D Drive mode

In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted automatically.

Kickdown

For sudden acceleration maneuvers such as passing, depress the accelerator past the resistance point. You achieve maximum acceleration.

Sport program and manual operation M/S

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a black knob and arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

Push selector lever toward the left from the selector lever position D, the Sport program is activated. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style.

The engaged gear, e.g. S1, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear.

The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the instrument cluster.

In the following situations, the 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch does the thinking for you:

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that could cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system.
At a stop, the transmission is automatically shifted down to the first gear.
Shortly before the speed falls below a gear-dependent minimum speed, the transmission automatically downshifts without your intervention.

Quick downshifting: even in sequential mode, you can skip over several gears in order to achieve an optimum acceleration. To do so, depress the accelerator past the resistance point.

To return to automatic mode, push the selector lever to the right.

Gear shifting

Upshift or downshift using the selector lever or the shift paddles. You do not have to let off of the gas to do this.

Using the selector lever

To upshift, pull the selector lever toward the rear.
To downshift, push it toward the front.

Using the shift paddles on the steering wheel

You can also shift manually using two shift paddles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.
If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to

automatic mode if the selector lever is in position D.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard gauges (no visible text or symbols)

To upshift, briefly pull the right shift paddle +.
To downshift, briefly pull the left shift paddle –.

Driving dynamics control

The driving dynamics control permits you, at the push of a button, to have your BMW react in an even more sporty fashion when driving:

▶ Optimal use is made of the engine's speed range.
▶ Gear changes occur more quickly.
The engine reacts more spontaneously to accelerator pedal movements.

Activating the system

SPORT

Press the SPORT button.

The LED in the button lights up.

Deactivating the system

▶ Press the SPORT button again
▶ Switch off engine
The LED in the button goes out.

Manually unlocking parking lock

In the event of a power supply interruption such as a discharged or disconnected battery or an electrical malfunction, the parking lock must be manually unlocked; otherwise, the rear wheels are immobilized and the vehicle cannot be towed.

Only unlock the parking lock manually for towing and make sure to set the parking brake forcefully beforehand so that the vehicle cannot roll. Lock the parking lock again after the vehicle is parked.

Releasing

1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.

Interior view of a car showing a car seatbelt switch and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

1. Using the allen wrench from the toolkit, refer to page 213, rotate the cover until it reaches the stop, arrow 1, and remove, arrow 2.

Diagram showing a mechanical component being inserted into a car intake, with an inset highlighting a component (no text or symbols present)

1. Insert allen wrench into the opening, arrow 1.

Diagram showing a car interior with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating flow or movement.

WORKERS

1. Rotate allen wrench until it reaches the stop, arrow 2. The parking lock is unlocked.

Do not turn allen wrench in the opposite direction; otherwise, you may go the mechanism.

1. Remove allen wrench from the opening.

After parking the vehicle, lock the parking lock again. Otherwise, there is a danger he vehicle will roll.

Locking

1. Press the button, see arrow. The parking lock is locked again.

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with a hand pointing to the intake (no text or symbols visible)

VOCOILDA

1. Replace cover again.
2. Clip the selector lever sleeve back into place.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake. Jump-starting and towing, starting on page 220.

Launch Control

Launch Control enables an optimum acceleration when starting off on a road surface with good traction.

Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, the powerful stresses on the vehicle will lead to premature component wear.

Launch Control is ready for use when the engine is at operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted travel of at least 6.2 miles/10 km.

1. With the engine running, step on the brake with your left foot.
2. Activate Dynamic Traction Control (DTC), refer to page, 82.
3. Activate Driving dynamics control, refer to page 62.
4. With the vehicle stationary, activate the manual mode and select 1 ^st gear.
5. With your right foot, push the accelerator pedal past the resistance point. The acceleration speed is adjusted. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster.
6. When you release the brake pedal, the vehicle accelerates. Keep the accelerator pedal floored.
7. The upshifting occurs automatically as long as you keep the accelerator pedal pressed past the resistance point.

Launch Control will be ready for use again after you drive a certain distance.

Launch Control is not available for use during the break-in phase, refer to page 112.

To maintain driving stability, keep DSC activated whenever possible.

Turn signals/headlamp flasher

Diagram of a wind turbine blade with numbered directional arrows indicating flow or movement paths.

1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals

Using turn signals

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp and the turn signals indicates that of the turn signal bulbs has failed.

Indicating a turn briefly

Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.

Triple turn signal activation

Press the lever as far as the resistance point. The turn signals flash three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"

Lighting Pathway light: 0 s Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Welcome light

RV Triple turn signal activation is activated and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Wiper system

1 2 3 4 5

1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps *
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Switching on wipers

Press the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Normal wiper speed

Press once.

The system switches to operation in the intermittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed

Press twice or press beyond the resistance point.

The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor\*

If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset.

If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

5 3

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.

Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn the thumb wheel 5.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor

Press the button again, arrow 3.

The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor before entering an automatic car wash. Failure to do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.

Cleaning windshield and headlamps\*

Pull the lever, arrow 4.

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time.

When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.

Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage the washer pump.

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are heated automatically* while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

Washer fluid

Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.

Therefore, keep it away from ignition

sources and only store it in the closed original container that is kept out of reach of children; otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury.

Comply with the instructions on the container.

Washer fluid filler neck

Only refill washer fluid when the engine is cool to avoid contact with hot engine

parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to personal safety.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a lever and inset detail (no visible text or symbols)

All washer nozzles are supplied with washer fluid by the same reservoir.

Fill with water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.

Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure

the correct concentration is maintained.

Capacity

Approx. 6.3USquarts/6liters.

Cruise control\*

The concept

You can use the cruise control feature beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column.

Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse

conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g. snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.

One lever for all functions

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    C["3"] --> D["4"]
    E["5"] --> F["6"]
    G["7"] --> H["8"]
    I["9"] --> J["10"]
    K["Off"] --> L["Power Supply"]

1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerating
2 Storing and maintaining speed or decelerating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Maintaining current speed

Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2. The car's current speed is stored and maintained. It is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.

If the engine braking power is insufficient on a downhill slope, the set speed may be exceeded. On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if engine power output is insufficient.

Increasing speed

Repeatedly press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

Each time the lever is pressed lightly, the speed is increased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

Accelerating using the lever

Press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.

Decreasing speed

Repeatedly pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is reached.

The functions are the same as when the set speed is increased or the vehicle is accelerated, except that in this case the speed decreases.

Deactivating cruise control

Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.

In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:

When you brake the vehicle
When you depress the clutch of a manual transmission or shift to neutral
When you select the automatic transmission's neutral position N
When you select the neutral position N with the Sports automatic transmission with double clutch
When the vehicle travels faster or slower than the set speed for an extended period, e.g. when the accelerator is depressed
When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC
When DSC is intervening

Resuming a speed stored beforehand

Press the button, arrow 4.

The last stored speed is resumed and maintained.

The stored speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.

The stored speed is cleared when the ignition is switched off.

Display in the instrument cluster

50 mph 012345m/s 6789

When the speed at which the vehicle is traveling is stored or when a stored speed is called up, the speed is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster.

Controls overview

Odometer, outside temperature display, clock

1 2 3 +74.0°F 11:15am 012345m/s 6789

1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer

Knob in the instrument cluster

To reset the trip odometer while the ignition is switched on
To display the time, outside temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off

Units of measure

To select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as ^ F or ^ C for the outside temperature, refer to Units of measure on page 72.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Time, outside temperature display

Setting the time, refer to page 74.

Outside temperature warning

When the displayed temperature falls to approx. +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.

Black ice can also form at temperatures above +37 °F/+3 °C. You should therefore drive carefully on bridges and shaded

roads, for example; otherwise, there is an increased risk of an accident.

Odometer and trip odometer

Resetting the trip odometer:

With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is parked

If you still want to view the time, outside temperature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the ignition lock:

Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Tachometer

r/min x 1000 0 7 6 250 340 789

Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature

A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addition, a message will appear on the Control Display.

Check coolant level, refer to page 206.

Engine oil temperature\*

180 250 30° 40°

When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 210 °F/100°C and approx. 300 °F/150°C.

If the engine oil temperature is too high, a message appears on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

0 1/2 180

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 14 US gallons/53 liters.

You can find information on refueling on page 192.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Fuel display 135i: in speedometer.

Reserve

Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone, a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the remaining cruising range is displayed on the computer. Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message appears continuously in the Control Display.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.

Computer

Displays in the instrument cluster

Calling up information

Close-up of a medical device with a cable inserted into a connector (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever.

11:15am +74.0 m/s → 345m/s 112345m/s 6789

The following items of information are displayed in the order listed:

Cruising range
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
No information

To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Setting the units of measure on page 72.

Cruising range

Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.

It is important that you refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls

below 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.

Average speed

Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.

With the trip computer, refer to page 71, you can have the average speed for another trip displayed.

To reset average speed: press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.

With the trip computer, refer to page 71, you can have the average consumption for another trip displayed.

To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn signal/high beam lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption

Displays the current fuel consumption. This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with minimum exhaust emissions.

Displays on the Control Display

The computer can also be opened via iDrive.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Vehicle Info Onboard info ✓ Trip computer Vehicle status

Displays in "Onboard info":

Onboard info 450 km Range 230 km To dest. 02:15 Arrival 10.5 l/100 km Cons. 75.0 km/h Speed

Cruising range
Distance from destination
Estimated time of arrival if:

A distance was manually entered in the computer, refer to the information below.
A destination was entered in the navigation system*, refer to page 121.

Displays in "Trip computer":

Trip computer 09:30 Depart. 01:20 hr Duration 140 km Distance 10.5 l/100 km Cons. 095.5 km/h Speed Reset

Departure time
Trip duration
Trip distance

Both displays show:

The average speed and
the average fuel consumption.

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed

You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption:

1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your selection.

Resetting the trip computer

You can reset all values:

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"

Settings and information

Operating principle

Diagram of a car dashboard with labeled control buttons and gauges, showing directional arrows and labels 1 and 2.

1 Button for:

Selecting display
Setting values

2 Button for:

▶ Confirming selected display or set values
▶ Calling up computer information 69

3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting brightness 95

4 Calling up Check Control 76

5 Checking oil level 203
6 Setting the time 74
7 Setting the date 75
8 Viewing service requirement display 72

Exiting displays

The outside temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.

Units of measure

The units of measure can be set.

Setting the units of measure

You can change the units for fuel consumption, route/distance, temperature and pressure.

1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"

Settings Time/Date ✓ Language/Units Tone Speed Climate Lighting Door locks

1. Select the desired menu item.
2. Select the desired unit.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

SERVICE -INFO

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
2. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items.

Service requirements

mls 10000 12/2006

The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.

The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by

your BMW Service Advisor.

For certain maintenance operations, you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster.

Possible displays

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SERVICE INFO 100000 12/2000 100000 12/2000 12/2000 100000 12/2000

1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test *
5 Front brake pads

More information

Detailed information on service requirements

You can call up additional information on the maintenance regimen on the Control Display.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Vehicle Info Onboard info ✓ Trip computer Vehicle status

1. "Service required"

6 Rear brake pads

7 Brake fluid

The sequence of displayed service items may vary. The data for the next service appointment is shown first.

Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.

You can request more detailed information on every entry:

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu:

Move the controller to the left.

Symbols

No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. Please rule a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections\*

Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly, refer to page 75; otherwise, the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not ensured.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"

Vehicle status Service required

1. "§ Vehicle inspection"

Service required OK Engine oil OK Front brake pads OK Rear brake pads OK Brake fluid OK Vehicle check OK $ Vehicle inspection

1. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
2. "Date:"
3. Create the settings.
4. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.
5. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
6. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

To exit from the menu:

Move the controller to the left.

More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page 207.

Automatic Service Request\*

Data regarding the maintenance status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are automatically transmitted to your BMW center prior to a service due date.

You can check when your BMW center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Vehicle Info Onboard info ✓ Trip computer Vehicle status

1. "Options"
2. "Last Service Request"

Clock

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

Setting the time

In the instrument cluster

To set the 12h/24h format, refer to Setting the time format on page 75.

11:15 am SET

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2. The system accepts the new time.

Via iDrive

1. Press the MENU button. The main menu is displayed.

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

1. "Settings"

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

Setting the time

1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"

Time/Date Time: 09:30 Format: 24 h Date: 27.05.2012 Format: tt.mrn.jjjj

1. "Time:"
2. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed, and then press the controller.
3. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed, and then press the controller.

The time is stored.

Setting the time format

1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The time format is stored.

Date

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 26.

Setting the date

In the instrument cluster

To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to Setting the date format below.

12.12.2008 SET

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2. The system stores the new date.

Via iDrive

1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed, and press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the month and year.

The date is stored.

Setting the date format

1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"

3. "Format:"

Date format ✓ dd.mm.yyyy mm/dd/yyyy

4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Check Control

The concept

The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the systems monitored. Such a Check Control message includes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circumstances, an acoustic signal as well as text messages at the top of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

Front view of a car dashboard with dual gauges and a central touchscreen (no visible text or symbols)

Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

012345m/s M1

⚠ indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. These Check Control messages can be viewed again later, refer to page 77.

Text messages

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages

You can call up more information on the Control Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control.

Details OK Washer fluid Insufficient washer fluid in fluid reservoir. Refill as soon as possible, refer to Owner's Manual.

The text of urgent messages is displayed automatically.

To exit the display:

Select "OK" and press the Controller.

Hiding Check Control messages

Close-up of a medical device with a connector inserted into a cylindrical component (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button on the turn signal/high beam lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and remain visible until the malfunction has been rectified. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this, they are displayed again automatically.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds.

They are stored and can be displayed again later.

They are marked with the symbol shown here.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

1 2 3 7 CHECK

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the words "CHECK".

2. Press button 2.

"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages. If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding lamp comes on. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.

1. Push button 1 to check for other messages.

2. Press button 2.

The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.

Via iDrive

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"

Vehicle status Check Control

1. Select the text message.

Speed limit

You can enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area.

You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit

1. "Settings"

2. "Speed"

3. "Warning at:"

Speed 6 km/h Warning Select current speed

1. Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed.
2. Press the controller.

The speed limit is stored.

Applying your current speed as the limit

1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"

Speed Speed 6 km/h Warning Select current speed

1. Press the controller.

The system adopts your current speed as the limit.

Activating/deactivating the limit

1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"

3. "Warning"

Speed Speed 6 km/h Warning Select current speed

1. Press the controller.

The limit warning is switched on.

Settings on the Control Display

Language on the Control Display

Setting the language

1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"

Language/Units Language: Deutsch Speech mode: Default Consumption: l/100 km Distance: km Temperature: °C

1. Select the desired language.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the voice dialog

Switch between a standard dialog and a short dialog.

1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select the desired dialog.

Speech mode ✓ Default Short

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness of the Control Display

The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the basic setting.

1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"

Control display Brightness

1. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
2. Press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. In bright conditions, for example, the brightness control may not be clearly visible.

Technology for driving comfort and safety

Park Distance Control PDC\*

The concept

The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual indicator warn you of the presence of an object behind your vehicle. Four ultrasonic sensors in the bumper measure the distance.

These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 2 ft/60 cm from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the center sensors.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed; otherwise, physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.

Switching on automatically

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated after approx. second when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selector lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.

Switching off automatically

After approx. 55 yd/50 m of driving or above approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system switches off and the LED goes out.

Signal tones

When nearing an object, its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.

An interval tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds:

If you stop in front of an object that has been detected by only one of the corner sensors
▶ If you are driving parallel to a wall

Malfunction

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. PDC is malfunctioning. A message appears on the Control Display. Have the system checked.

To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.

PDC with visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds. The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.

System limitations

Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are provided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with trailer towbars and hitches, thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal. Therefore, always drive cautiously; otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.

Driving stability control systems

Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.

Antilock Brake System ABS

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.

The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 114.

Electronic brake-force distribution EBV

The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

Dynamic Brake Control DBC

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.

Dynamic Stability Control DSC

DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accelerate. The system also recognizes unstable driving conditions, for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the individual wheels.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin again by taking risks, as this could result in an accident.

Deactivating DSC

大红 DTC

Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indicator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster light up. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have been simultaneously deactivated.

Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions are no longer executed.

In the same way as with a differential interlock*, even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are still performed on the rear axle to enhance drive output if the drive wheels experience a significant loss of traction.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC

Press the button again; the indicator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster go out.

For better control

If the indicator lamp flashes:

DSC is regulating the drive and braking forces.

If the indicator lamps are on: DSC is deactivated.

Dynamic Traction Control DTC

DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive output is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The system assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

When driving uphill on snow-covered roads, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered roads
When rocking a stuck vehicle free or starting off in deep snow or on loose ground
When driving with snow chains

Activating DTC

DTC

Press the button; the indicator lamps for DTC in the instrument cluster come on.

For better control

If the indicator lamp flashes:

DTC is regulating the drive and braking forces.

DTC

If the indicator lamps are on:

DTC has been activated.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

Drive-off assistant

The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this.

1. Hold the car in place by depressing the brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without delay.

The drive-off assistant holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the brake is released. Drive off without delay after releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off

assistant will no longer hold the car in place after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to roll backwards.

Flat Tire Monitor FTM\*

The concept

The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.

The system detects a tire pressure loss due to speed comparisons among the individual wheels as you drive.

In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circumference changes and, thus, the rotating speed of the affected wheel. The system detects this and reports it as a flat tire.

Functional requirement

The system has to have been initialized at the correct inflation pressure; otherwise, a reliable reporting of a flat tire is not assured.

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reinitialize the system.

System limitations

It is impossible to provide advance warning of sudden, severe tire damage caused by outside influences.

The system will not detect a natural, uniform pressure loss in all four tires. Therefore you should check the inflation pressure regularly.

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

System has not been initialized
▶ Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
▶ Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
Driving with snow chains*

Status display

The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or not the FTM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

Vehicle status Flat Tire Monitor Status: Flat Tire Monitor active

The status is displayed.

Initialization

In the initialization, the set inflation pressures are adopted as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. The initialization is begun by confirmation of the inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system while snow chains are attached.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"

Vehicle status Reset

1. Start the engine – do not drive away.
2. Start the initialization using "Reset".
3. Start driving.

The initialization is completed during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is continued automatically.

Indication of a flat tire

The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.

What to do in case of a flat tire

Run-flat tires

With a damaged tire, is possible to continue driving at speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, refer to 200; continued driving could result in a re accident.

When continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the air pressure in all four tires.

If all four tires are inflated to the correct pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor not have been initialized. The system then be initialized.

Possible travel distance with complete tire pressure loss:

With a light load:

1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km

With a medium load:

2 persons, cargo area full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 90 miles/150 km

With a full load:

4 persons, cargo area full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling characteristics change, e.g. there will be reduced directional stability during braking, braking distances will be longer, and self-steering response will change.

Vibrations or loud noises during driving may indicate the final failure of the tire.

Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; otherwise, tire components may become detached, which could result in an accident. Do not continue driving; instead, contact your BMW center.

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM\*

The concept

Check the inflation pressure in the four installed tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.

Functional requirement

The system has to have been reset at the correct inflation pressure; otherwise, a reliable reporting of a flat tire is not assured.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics to assure a trouble-free function of the system.

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been ged, reset the system.

System limitations

It is impossible to provide advance warning of sudden, severe tire damage caused tside influences.

The system does not function correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be indicated even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.

The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire:

when a wheel without TPM electronics is installed.
when other systems or devices that use the same radio frequency interfere with TPM.

Status display

The current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"

Vehicle status Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM Status: TPM active

The status is displayed.

Status indicator on the Control Display

The color of the tires represents the status of the tires and the system.

A change in the inflation pressure during driving is taken into account.

A correction is only needed if TPM indicates it.

Green

The inflation pressure corresponds to the desired state.

"TPM active" appears in the Control Display.

One wheel yellow

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in the indicated tire.

All wheels yellow

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure in several tires.
The system was not reset after a wheel change and will thus issue warnings at the last initialized inflation pressures.

Gray

The system cannot detect a puncture.

The reasons for this are as follows:

TPM is being reset.
Interference from systems or devices that use the same radio frequency.
Malfunction.

Resetting the system

Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed, reset the system.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset TPM"

Vehicle status Reset TPM

1. Start the engine – do not drive away.
2. "Reset"
3. "Yes"
4. Start driving.

The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The resetting is completed automatically as you drive. On the Control Display, the wheels are shown in green and "Status: TPM active" is displayed.

You can stop driving at any time. The resetting continues automatically when you resume driving.

If a flat tire is detected during the resetting process, all tires are displayed in yel-

low in the Control Display. The message "Low tire!" is displayed.

Message for low tire inflation pressure

The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds.

There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
The system was not reset after a wheel change and will thus issue warnings at the last initialized inflation pressures.

Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires, refer to page 200; continued driving could result in a severe accident.

Continuing to drive with a flat tire

Possible travel distance with complete tire pressure loss:

With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km
With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo area full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 95 miles/150 km
With a full load: 4 persons, cargo area full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling characteristics change, e.g. there will be reduced directional stability during braking, braking distances will be longer, and self-steering response will change.

Vibrations or loud noises during driving may indicate the final failure of the tire.

Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; otherwise, tire components may become detached, which could result in an accident. Do not continue driving; instead, contact your BMW center.

Message for unsuccessful system reset

Yellow warning lamp comes on. A message appears on the Control Display.

The system is not reset, e.g. after a wheel change.

Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, refer to page 85.

Malfunction

The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continuously; the large warning lamp comes on in yellow. The tires appear in gray

in the Control Display. No punctures can be detected.

Display in the following situations:

Malfunction:
Have the system checked
A wheel without TPM electronics has been installed:
Have it checked by your BMW center.
▶ Interference from systems or devices that use the same radio frequency:
The system automatically becomes active again when the vehicle moves out of the interference zone.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138

Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems

Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure indicator.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Active steering\*

The concept

Active steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel movements. It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving.

When you are driving in the low road speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering angle is increased, i.e. steering becomes very direct and less effort is required to turn the wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced as the speed increases. This improves the handling of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make targeted corrections to the steering angle provided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 81.

Malfunction

The warning lamps come on. Active steering is malfunctioning or is temporarily deactivated. At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements

are required, whereas at higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements. The stability-enhancing feature may also be deactivated. Drive cautiously and think well ahead.

Deactivation

Active steering is deactivated to perform an initialization. A message indicates that the feature is deactivated. Initialization may take several minutes.

If the message does not disappear during the current trip, have the system checked.

Defect

If there is a defect, a corresponding text message appears. Have the system checked.

Servotronic\*

The concept

The Servotronic varies the steering force required to turn the wheels relative to the vehicle speed.

At low speeds, the steering force is strongly assisted, i.e. less force is needed for steering.

As the vehicle speed increases, the steering assisting power is reduced.

This system functions automatically.

Malfunctions

Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control, refer to page 76.

Brake Force Display\*

Side profile illustrations of a car showing front and rear side views (no text or symbols)

On the left: normal braking.

On the right: sharp braking.

Airbags

Diagram of a car interior with numbered components for identification

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
4 Convertible: knee airbags

Protective action

Observe the adjustment instructions on page 43 to ensure the best possible per-protection.

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.

The airbags have been designed to not be triggered in every collision situation, e.g. not in minor accidents or rear-end collisions.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or by them in any other way.

Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instruments and mobile phones.

Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not specifically approved for seats with integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove

the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not modify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the upholstered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.

Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns.

In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal and disposal of airbag generators executed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of BMW with correspondingly trained personnel and that has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.

Warning notices and information about the air bags can also be found on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags

An analysis of the impression in the front passenger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side air bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.

The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger airbags below.

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precautions and handling instructions under Transporting children safely, refer to page 52. The front and side airbags can also be deactivated by adolescents and adults sitting in certain positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the relevant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Otherwise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.

Status of front passenger airbags

Diagram showing a device with a cable inserted into a container, no text or symbols present

The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags shows the functional status of the front passenger front and side airbags in accordance with whether and how the front passenger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deactivated.

The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a specially designated child restraint system is detected, as intended, on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.

Most child seats are detected by the system, especially child seats

required by the NHTSA at the time of vehicle production. After mounting a child seat, ensure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the child seat has been detected and that the front passenger airbags are deactivated.

The indicator lamp does not come on when, for example, a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are activated.
The indicator lamp does not come on if the seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front passenger are not activated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

Interior view of a car dashboard with gauges and a small inset image showing a person walking (no text or symbols)

As of radio readiness, refer to page 55, the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.

Airbag system malfunction

Warning lamp does not light up at radio readiness or beyond.
Warning lamp remains permanently on.

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay; otherwise, there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe accident occurs.

Convertible: rollover protection system

The rollover protection system is activated automatically in the event of an accident, a critical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact. The protection bars behind the rear head restraints deploy within fractions of a second.

As a supplementary system to the reinforced windshield frame, the rollover protection system ensures that the necessary headroom is maintained for all vehicle occupants.

Always keep the area of movement of the rollover protection system clear.

In minor accidents, you are protected by the fastened safety belt and, depending on accident severity, by the safety belt tensioner and multi-phase airbag retention system.

Resetting

If the rollover protection system was not impacted after being automatically activated, it can be reset by lowering the protection bars to their original positions. This does not require tools.

1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold it there.

Illustration of a hand holding a black object with arrows indicating movement or force, next to a close-up of a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

1. Push the protection bar halfway down from above.

2. Release the locking lever.

3. Push the protection bar down until it snaps into place.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black seatbelt and arrow indicating a location (no text or symbols)

1. Repeat the procedure for the other protection bar.

Have the rollover protection system checked after an unexpected activation.

Never move the convertible top when the rollover protection system is in the acti- l position.

Do not make any modifications to the individual components of the rollover protection system or its cabling.

Work on the rollover protection system should only be performed by a BMW center.

Incorrectly performed work on the system may lead to system failure or incorrect operation.

To check the system and ensure flawless long-term operation, always observe the service intervals, refer to page 72.

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

0 1 3 2

0 Lamps off, daytime running lights

1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
2 Low beams, welcome lamps*
3 Automatic headlamp control *, daytime running lights, welcome lamps*, high-beam assistant*, adaptive light control*

When you open the driver's door with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off if the light switch is in position 0, 2 or 3.

Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch position 1.

Parking lamps

In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.

The parking lamps will discharge the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not have enough power to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps, refer to page 93.

Low-beam headlamps

The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

Automatic headlamp control\*

When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depending on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The adaptive light control* is active. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on. You can also activate the daytime running lights, refer to page 92. In the situations described above, the lamps then automatically switch from daytime running lights to low beams.

The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.

The low beams remain switched on independent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the fog lamps*.

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low-beam headlamps manually under these conditions.

Welcome lamps

If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when you park the car, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up briefly when you unlock the vehicle.

Activating/deactivating welcome lamps

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"

3. "Welcome light"

Lighting Pathway light: 0 s Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps ✓ Welcome light

Welcome lamps are activated and are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Pathway lighting

If you activate the headlamp flasher after switching off the ignition with the lamps switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.

Setting the duration or deactivating

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light."
4. Set a time of duration, or 0 s to deactivate the function.

Lighting Pathway light: 0 s Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Welcome light

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Daytime running lights

The daytime running lights light up in switch position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than the low beams.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lights

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"

Lighting Pathway light: 0 s Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Welcome light

Daytime running lights are activated and are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Adaptive light control\*

The concept

Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h, e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside area of the curve.

Activating adaptive light control

With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 91.

The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on automatically, depending on the steering wheel angle or turn signal indicator.

Standstill function*: to avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the adaptive light control directs light towards the front passenger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.

When you are reversing, only the corner-illuminating lamps are switched on and active on both sides.

Malfunction

The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-lamp control flashes. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

High beams/roadside parking lamps\*

Diagram showing a car interior with numbered directional arrows and labeled zones, likely indicating movement or navigation.

1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps *

Roadside parking lamps, left or right\*

There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked.

Switching on

After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for approx. 1 second, arrow 3.

The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Therefore, do not leave them on for unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the battery might not have enough power to start the engine.

Switching off

Press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.

High-beam assistant\*

The concept

This system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation allows. It handles this task for you and gives you the benefit of the best possible view. You can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating the system

1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 91.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever in the direction of the high beam.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high beams are activated. The system automatically switches from high beams to low beams and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic, traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient lighting, e.g. on city streets.

Switching the high beams on and off manually

Whenever you wish, or when the situation requires, you can intervene:

If the high-beam assistant switches on the high beams, but you would like to drive with the low beams, simply switch off the high beams using the turn signal/high beam lever. This deactivates the high-beam assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever toward the high beams again.

If the high-beam assistant switches on the low beams, but you would like to drive with the high beams, switch on the high beams as usual. This deactivates the system and the high beams need to be switched off manually, if necessary.

To reactivate the system, briefly push the turn signal/high beam lever toward the high beams again.

Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the low beams switched on.

System limitations

The high-beam assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary:

In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation
In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways
In poorly lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs
At low speeds
When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.
If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror using a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Activating via iDrive

1. "Settings"

2. "Lighting"

3. "High beam assistant"

Lighting Pathway light: 0 s Triple turn signal Daytime running lamps Welcome light ✓ High beam assistant

The high-beam assistant is activated and is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Fog lamps\*

Close-up of a hand holding a small electronic device with a close-up inset showing a black key labeled 'ISO' (no readable text or symbols on the device itself)

To switch on/off, press the button.

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.

The fog lamps are switched off while you activate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.

If the automatic headlamp control is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps.

Instrument lighting

You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on.

1 2 1 SET

1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompanied by the brightness level and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

min max

1. Push button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness level.

2. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside temperature and the time.

Interior lamps

The interior lamps, footwell lamps *, entry lamps*, the cargo area lamp and courtesy lamps* are controlled automatically.

The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.

To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the car are switched off about 8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer to Start/stop button on page 55.

Switching interior lamps on/off manually

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle rearview with a mounted device and a circular base (no text or symbols visible)

Interior lamps, front and rear*: To switch on and off, press the button.

To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* permanently, press the button for the front interior lamps for about 3 seconds.

Reading lamps

Diagram showing two computer monitors mounted on a car intake tank, with arrows pointing to the monitors (no text or symbols present)

There are reading lamps at the front and rear*, next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off, press the button.

Climate

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 MAX O AUTO 74°F 72°F ALL 1

1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area: Draft-free ventilation 99
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature, left side
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air volume, manual adjustment; AUTO intensity
9 Display

10 Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air mode
11 Temperature, right side
12 ALL program
13 Defrosting windows and removing condensation
14 Switching cooling function on/off manually
15 Rear window defroster
16 Seat heating *, right side 48
17 Interior temperature sensor, please keep clear
18 Seat heating *, left side 48

Automatic climate control

Comfortable interior climate

AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution and air volume for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfortable for you.

The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 26.

Adjusting air distribution manually

The air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windshield, to the upper body area and to the

footwell.

The automatic air distribution can be switched back on by pressing the AUTO button. The cooling function is switched on automatically and the manual air distribution setting is cleared.

Temperature

Turn to set the desired temperature.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as

quickly as possible regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.

Avoid rapid switching between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Maximum heating power can be obtained with the highest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.

The system cools steadily in the lowest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.

Maximum cooling

Press the button.

The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air volume and recirculated-air mode.

Air flows out of the vent outlets for the upper body region. Open them for this purpose.

Air is cooled as quickly as possible

Above an outside temperature of approx. 32^ F/0°C

When the engine is running

AUTO program

Press the button.

Air volume, air distribution and temperature are controlled auto-

matically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity and outside influences, the air is directed toward the windshield, the side windows, the upper body, and the footwell.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.

At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible.

The program is switched off when the air distribution is set manually or the button is pressed again.

Intensity of the AUTO program

With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air volume and air distribution can be adjusted:

Press the left side of the button to reduce the intensity. Press the right side of the button to increase

it.

The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control.

Convertible program

The Convertible program is active when the convertible top is open and the AUTO program is switched on. In the Convertible program, the

automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the convertible top down. In addition, the air volume is increased as vehicle speed increases.

The effectiveness of the Convertible program can be enhanced considerably by ling the wind deflector.

Adjusting air volume manually

To be able to manually adjust the air volume, switch off the AUTO program first.

Press the left side of the button to reduce air volume. Press the right side of the button to increase it.

The air volume may be reduced or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery power. The display remains the same.

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC/Recirculated-air mode

You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

▶ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.
Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-air mode and increase the air volume, if necessary. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield.

The recirculated-air mode should not be used continuously for lengthy periods; otherwise, the quality of the air inside the car will gradually deteriorate.

Via the button on the steering wheel

You can switch quickly between the recircu-lated-air mode and the previous mode using a button on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

ALL program

Press the button.

The current temperature setting on the driver's side is transferred to the front passenger side.

If the temperature setting on the driver's side is changed, the temperature on the front passenger side is changed as well.

The program is switched off when the setting is adjusted on the front passenger side or the button is pressed again.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Press the button.

Quickly removes ice and condensation from the windshield and

front side windows.

For this purpose, also switch on the cooling function.

Switching cooling function on/off

The passenger compartment can only be cooled while the engine is running.

Press the button.

The air is cooled and dehumidified and – depending on the tempera-

ture setting – warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

Pressing the AUTO button automatically switches on the cooling function.

Rear window defroster

Press the button.

The defroster is switched off automatically after a certain time.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off

With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to switch off the automatic cli-

mate control.

All displays are cleared except for the rear window defroster if it is switched on.

The outside air supply is blocked when the automatic climate control is switched off. If the air quality deteriorates or the window fogs over, switch the system back on and increase the air volume.

Switching on

Press any button except the ALL or the rear window defroster button to reactivate the automatic climate control.

Ventilation

1 2 2 1

1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open and close the air vents

2 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow

Ventilation for cooling

Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance if it has become too hot in the car.

Draft-free ventilation

Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW center replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance.

Parked car ventilation\*

The concept

The parked car ventilation provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature, if necessary.

The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive, refer to page 16. Two different switch-on times can be preselected.

The parked car ventilation remains switched on for approx. 30 minutes. The system can also be switched on and off directly. Due to its high power consumption, it should not be switched on twice in a row without driving in between to allow the battery to recharge.

The parked car ventilation system comes on if the outside temperature is above 59 °F/15 °C when the switch-on time was preselected, but is ready for use at any temperature when the system is switched on directly.

The air emerges from the air vents for the upper body area in the instrument panel. The air vents must therefore be open.

Switching on and off directly

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."

Climate Activate parked-car vent. Activate Timer 1 Timer 1: Activate Timer 2 Timer 2:

The parked car ventilation is switched on. The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes.

Preselecting switch-on times

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. Activate Timer 2"Activate Timer 1" o
4. Timer 2:"Timer 1:" o

Climate ✓ Activate parked-car vent. ✓ Activate Timer 1 Timer 1: 8:00 ✓ Activate Timer 2 Timer 2: -

1. Turn the controller: set the hours.
2. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.
3. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
4. Press the controller: the setting is accepted.

The switch-on time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control display lights up.

The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes when the system has switched on.

The respective system is switched on within the next 24 hours only. After these have elapsed, it must be reactivated.

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote control\*

The concept

The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmitters for various remote-controlled devices, such as garage doors and gates or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original hand-held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons 1. After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the signal.

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 102.

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated. Comply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.

Checking compatibility

If this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, you can

assume that the radio remote control device will be compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

For additional information, please contact your BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.

You can also obtain information on the Internet at:

www.bmwusa.com or

www.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

Programming

2 1 VALENTZAWA

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters

1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
2. When starting operation for the first time: press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem- buttons 1 depends on the system of the effective original hand-held transmitter

1. Simultaneously press the transmit key on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step.
2. To program other original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the device while the ignition is switched on.

If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly and then remains lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If it uses an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters

To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the device to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization. When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

If you have any questions, please contact your BMW center.

Deleting all stored programs

Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly: all stored programs are deleted.

Reassigning individual programs

1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
   The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-uttons 1 depends on the system of the active original hand-held transmitter
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit key of the original hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step.

Digital compass\*

2—SW 1

1 Adjustment button

2 Display

The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.

Operating principle

You can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed:

▶ Press briefly: switch display on/off
3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone
6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand steering
12 to 15 seconds: set the language

Setting compass zones

Set the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location so that the compass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.

To set the compass zone, press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display.

To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corresponding to your current location.

The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.

MARTICUM

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:

An incorrect compass direction is shown.
The compass direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does.
Not all compass directions are shown.

Procedure

1. Make sure that no large metal objects or overhead power lines are in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Convertible: ensure that the convertible top is fully closed.
4. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the display changes from C to a compass direction.
5. Convertible: open the convertible top fully and repeat step 4.

Setting right-hand/left-hand steering

Your digital compass is factory-set to right-hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with your vehicle.

Set the language

You can set the language of the display:

Press the adjustment button for approx.

12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English, "E", and German, "O".

The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.

Glove compartment

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment comes on.

To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven, close the glove compartment immediately after use.

Closing

Fold the cover up.

Locking

To lock the glove compartment, use the integrated key of the remote control, refer to page 26.

USB interface for data transmission

Port for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g. music collections, refer to page 162.

Observe the following when connecting:

Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.

Do not connect USB hard drives.
Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.

Center armrest

Storage compartment

The center armrest between the front seats contains a credit card holder and, depending on the equipment version, a compartment or a snap-in adapter*.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted section and arrow pointing to a circular feature (no text or symbols visible)

Opening

Press the button, see arrow.

Connection for external audio device

You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system:

AUX-IN port, refer to page 163
USB audio interface*/additional connection of the music player in the mobile phone*, refer to page 163

Storage compartments inside the vehicle

Compartments are located next to the steering column*, on the doors and in the center console.

There are nets* on the front-seat backrests.

Coupe: clothes hooks

There are clothes hooks in the rear.

Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.

Cupholders

Use lightweight and shatterproof containers and do not transport hot beverages; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the accident. Do not force containers that are too large into the cupholders; otherwise, damage could result.

Close-up of a car interior showing a car's dashboard and intake manifold (no text or symbols visible)

There is one cupholder in the center console.

Interior view of a car showing the steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

You can mount an attachable cupholder* on the side of the center console.

Ashtray\*

Opening

Close-up of a car interior showing a hand pressing a button with an arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols visible)

Push the ridge on the cover.

Emptying

Close-up of a car interior showing a white upward arrow pointing to a dark rectangular component (no text or symbols visible)

Lift out the insert.

Lighter

Close-up of a car interior with a hand pointing to a glass door (no visible text or symbols)

With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in areas could result in burns.

When leaving the car, always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.

Connecting electrical appliances

In your BMW, when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on, you can use electrical devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at 12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets is available. Avoid damaging the socket by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.

Cigarette lighter socket\*

To access the socket:

Open the ashtray at the front and pull out the lighter to use the socket.

In the cargo area\*

To access the socket: Fold open the cover.

In the center console

To access the socket, refer to External devices on page 163.

Coupe: through-loading system

Opening

Interior view of a car showing rearview and side profile views with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area.

2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves forward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the head restraint.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

Closing

Return the rear seat backrest to the upright seating position and engage it.

When returning the backrest into the seating position, make sure that the seat's locking mechanism is properly engaged. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown around and endanger the occupants in the event of sharp braking or swerving.

The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you with a way to attach cargo area nets* or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 114.

Convertible: cargo loading

Enlarging the cargo area

Top-down view of a car showing airflow or traffic flow direction (no text or symbols)

When the convertible top is closed you can enlarge the cargo area:

To do so, fold the cargo area partition upward.

Before opening the convertible top, pull the cargo area partition down until it engages.

Ensure that pointed objects do not press against the cargo area partition from below.

The convertible top can only be opened when the cargo area partition is folded down.

Storage compartments inside the cargo area

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo area:

Rubber strap* on the left trim panel for securing small objects such as a folding umbrella
Net* for small objects on the right trim panel of the cargo area
Retaining straps* on cargo area floor: for securing smaller objects or as an anti-slip surface when you place objects on the straps

The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you with a way to attach cargo area nets* or draw straps* for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 116.

Coupe: ski bag\*

The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snow boards.

With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6.6ft/2.0m. When skis of 6.6ft/2.0 length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.

Loading

Ensure that the skis are clean when they are loaded into the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and fold down the cover. To stabilize the cover

in the folded-down position, place the center panel underneath it.

Close-up of a white door with a black circular button and an arrow pointing right (no text or symbols)

1. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards.

The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.

1. Attach the hook of the ski bag retaining strap to the eyelet on the side of the ski bag opening.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car seatbelt with two inset photos (no visible text or symbols)

Securing cargo

Close-up of a hand wearing a wrist strap, partially enclosed in a vehicle window (no visible text or symbols)

After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the ski bag in the manner described; otherwise, it could endanger

the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.

To store the ski bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.

Removing the ski bag

The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.

2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.

3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.

For more information on the various inserts available, contact your BMW cen-

Convertible: through-loading opening with integrated transport bag\*

The transport bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.

With the transport bag you can stow skis up to a length of 6.6 ft/2.0 m. When skis of 6.6 ft/2.0 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.

When using the transport bag, it is not permissible to transport passengers in rear seats.

Loading

1. Pull the grip in the filler piece of the rear backrest up and take out the filler piece.
2. Place the filler piece onto the seat cushion with the backrest side facing up.

Interior view of a car showing two black seat compartments mounted on a vehicle chassis (no text or symbols visible)

1. In the cargo area: press the two recesses together and fold down the cover.

Top-down view of a car interior showing the front and rear compartments with no visible text or symbols

1. Release the strap, lay out the transport bag between the front seats and load it. The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a dark-colored fabric or cushion on the backrest, with no visible text or symbols.

Ensure that the skis are clean when you load them into the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.

Securing cargo

Interior view of a vehicle cabin with a black plastic seat and attached arm (no visible text or symbols)

After loading, secure the transport bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.

Secure the transport bag in the manner described; otherwise, it could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.

To store the transport bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 129 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Driving tips

This section provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.

Things to remember when driving

Break-in period

Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.

Engine and differential

Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kickdown mode.

After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.

Tires

Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

Saving fuel

The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on several factors. You can lower fuel consumption and the environmental impact by taking certain measures, adjusting your driving style and having the vehicle serviced regularly.

Remove any unneeded cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Remove any mounted parts after you have finished using them

Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof rack and the rear luggage rack after use. Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynamics and increase fuel consumption.

Close the windows and glass roof

An open glass roof or window causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consumption.

Check tire inflation pressure regularly

Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before embarking on a long journey, and correct it if necessary.

Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling resistance and thus increases fuel consumption and tire wear.

Set off immediately

Do not let the engine warm up while the car is still standing, but set off immediately at moderate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

Drive defensively

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate distance between you and the vehicle in front of you. A defensive and smooth driving style keeps fuel consumption down.

Avoid high engine speeds

Only use first gear when setting off. In second and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds.

When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a constant speed.

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

Coasting

When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a stop in the highest applicable gear.

On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accelerator and coast in a suitable gear.

The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.

Switch off the engine during lengthy stops

Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel savings even if standing time is as short as approx. 4 seconds.

Switch off functions you do not need at the moment

Functions such as the air conditioner, seat heating or rear window defroster draw large amounts of power and consume additional fuel. Especially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driving they have a considerable impact. Therefore, switch these functions off when they are not really needed.

Have the vehicle serviced

Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW recommends having the vehicle serviced at a BMW center. Also note the BMW service system, refer to page 207.

General driving notes

Close the trunk lid

Operate the vehicle only when the trunk lid is closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes enter the interior of the vehicle.

If the vehicle must be driven with the trunk lid open:

1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the automatic climate control system, refer to page 98.

Hot exhaust system

In all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated in the exhaust systems. Do not remove the heat shields installed in vicinity, and never apply undercoating to . When driving, standing at idle and while, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly amable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, such contact could lead to a fire, with the lack of serious personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.

Hydroplaning

When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge of water can form between tires and road surface. This situation, known as hydroplaning, means that the tire can completely lose contact with the road surface, so that neither the car can be steered nor the brake be properly applied. The risk of hydroplaning increases with declining tread depth on the tires, refer also to Minimum tread depth on page 199.

Driving through water

Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.

Use the parking brake on inclines

On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a lengthy period using the clutch; use the parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater clutch wear will result.

For more information about the drive-off assistant, refer to page 82.

Braking safely

Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

Hills

To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system, drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if necessary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Downshifting in manual mode of the automatic transmission, refer to page 59.

Sports automatic transmission with double clutch Never drive with the transmission in neutral or the engine switched off; otherwise, there is no engine braking action or power assist to the brakes and steering.

Manual transmission: never drive with the clutch depressed, the transmission in neutral, or the engine switched off; otherwise, there is no engine braking action or power assist to the brakes and steering.

Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals, otherwise, pedal function could be impaired.

Corrosion on brake rotors

When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

When the vehicle is parked

Condensation forms while the automatic climate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

Cargo loading

To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage

develops inside the tires. In some cases, this can result in sudden tire pressure loss.

Make sure that no liquids are spilled or leak from their containers in the cargo area, as this could result in damage to the vehicle.

Determining loading limit

Interior view of a car showing the door, seatbelt, and dashboard panel (no text or symbols visible)

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions may result.

1. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

2. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

3. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.

4. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

5. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for

transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

+ ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. Load + ≦ Max. Load

The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.

Stowing cargo

Coupe

Two side-by-side illustrations of a sedan showing front and side views of the seat, no text or symbols present.

Convertible

Side-view diagram of a car showing open lid, seat compartments, and battery compartment (no text or symbols)

Position heavy objects as low and as far forward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backrests.

▶ Cover sharp edges and corners.

For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.

Securing cargo

2 2 1 1

Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining straps*, a cargo area net* or draw straps*.
Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. To attach the cargo straps, there are two lashing eyes, arrows 1, on the inside wall of the cargo area. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, there may be two additional lashing eyes, arrows 2, on the cargo area sidewalls. Follow the information included with the cargo straps.

Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endanger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerving is necessary.

Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 229, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws.

Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occupants.

Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to page 53, otherwise, these could be damaged.

Coupe: roof-mounted luggage rack\*

A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions.

Mounting points

Close-up of a car's roof with two mounted rectangular objects on the side (no visible text or symbols)

Fold open the cover.

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.

You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 229.

The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the glass roof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the trunk lid.

Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 129 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Navigation This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your destination. Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 129 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Navigation

This chapter describes how you can enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you reliably to your destination.

Navigation system\*

General information

With the help of satellites and vehicle sensors, the navigation system is able to ascertain the precise position of the vehicle and reliably guide you to any destination you enter.

Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Failure to take to this precaution can place you in violation of the law and put vehicle occupants and other road users in danger.

Navigation data

General information

Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and can be updated.

Navigation data and authorization codes are available from your BMW center.

Depending on the data volume, a data update may take several hours.

The data are updated while you are driving.
The update is resumed automatically when a trip is continued after an interruption.
Basic navigation functions are available during the trip.
The data are stored in the vehicle.
▶ After the update, the system restarts.
The medium that holds the navigation data can be removed after the update is completed.

Updating the navigation data

Inserting navigation DVD

1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
3. Enter the authorization code of the navigation DVD and change the DVD if needed.

Removing navigation DVD

Interior view of a car dashboard with air conditioner and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

1. Press button 1. The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

Information about navigation data

1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version": Information on the data version is displayed.

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from the following options:

Entering a destination manually, see below
Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 123
Last destinations, refer to page 124
▶ Special destinations, refer to page 124
Entering a destination on the map, refer to page 126
▶ Selecting home address, refer to page 124
Entering a destination by voice commands*, refer to page 127
Destination entry via BMW Assist*, refer to page 125

You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 20.

Enter data only when the vehicle is stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions and the instructions issued by the navigation system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and other road users may be endangered.

Entering a destination manually

The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns, refer to page 129. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically, so that stored names can be called up quickly.

1. Press the MENU button.

2. "Navigation"

3. "Enter address"

Navigation ✓ Enter address Address book Last destinations Points of Interest Map Route information

The system also supports you with the following features:

If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.
You can skip the entry of state/province and town/city if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.

Entering a state/province

1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed state/province.

Entering a town/city

1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the displayed town/city.

Enter address UNITED STATES Town/City? (BEVERLY HILLS, CA) Street House number Intersection Accept destination Points of Interest at loc.

1. Select letters, if necessary.

To delete letters:

To delete individual letters: Turn the controller to select |, and then press the controller.

To delete all letters: Turn the controller to select I, and then press the controller for an extended period.

To enter spaces:

Select the symbol.

The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

1. Move the controller to the right.
2. Select the name of the town/city from the list.

If there are several towns/cities with the same name:

1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is displayed.
3. Select the town/city.

Entering the postal code

1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the displayed town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and towns/cities.
5. Highlight the postal code: a preview map is displayed.
6. Select the postal code.

Entering street and intersection

1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection as you would the town/city.

After the street you can also enter the intersection or the house number.

If there are several streets with the same name:

1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street: a preview map is displayed.
3. Select the street.

Entering a street without a destination town/city

You can also enter a street without specifying a town/city. In this case, all streets of the same name in the designated state/province are offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can negate this entry. This could be helpful in instances where the desired street does not exist in the entered town/city because it belongs to another suburb, for example.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the state/province currently displayed.

in BEVERLY HILLS, CA In UNITED STATES MUSÄUSSTRASSE MUSENBERGSTRASSE MUSEUMSINSEL MUSPELHEIMSTRASSE MUSPILLISTRASSE

1. Select the letters.
2. Change to the list of street names.
3. Highlight the street: a preview map is displayed.
4. Select the street.

Entering a house number

You can enter any house number stored in the navigation data for the street.

1. "House number"
2. Select the digits.
3. Change to the list of house numbers.
4. Select a house number or range of house numbers.

Starting destination guidance after entering the destination

1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Set your "Route preference", refer to page 130.

Search for "Points of Interest at loc.", refer to page 124.

Address book

To create contacts, refer to page 182.

Selecting a destination from the address book

1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"

Contacts with addresses are displayed if these addresses have been checked as destinations.

If the contacts with addresses from the mobile phone * are not displayed, they first need to be checked as destinations, refer to page 183.

Navigation Enter address ✓ Address book Last destinations Points of interest Map Route information

1. Select a contact from the list or, if necessary, using "A-Z search".

2. If necessary, select "Business address" or "Home address".

Storing a destination in the address book

Store the destination in the address book after entering the destination.

1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

Options Split screen Switch off control display Enter address Store as new contact Add to existing contact BMW Assist destination entry Navigation

1. Select an existing contact, if available.
2. Select "Business address" or "Home address".
3. Enter "Last name" and first name "First name" if necessary.
4. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position

Your current position can be stored in the address book.

1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position to contact".

Options Split screen Switch off control display Navigation Store position as contact Add position to contact Receive Traffic Info Dynamic guidance

1. Depending on the selection, select an existing contact from the list or the type of address and enter the last and first name.
2. "Store in vehicle"

Editing or deleting an address

1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".

Using the home address as a destination

The home address must be stored as a destination. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home address, page 182.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"

Address book Check My contacts address Home Andreas Angela Hans-Juergen Marcus

1. "Start guidance"

Last destinations

The last destinations are stored automatically. These destinations can be called up and used as a destination for destination guidance.

Opening the last destinations

1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"

Navigation Enter address Address book ✓ Last destinations Points of interest Map Route information

1. Select the destination.
2. "Start guidance"

Editing a destination

Destinations can be edited, for example, to change the house number of an existing entry.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"

Deleting the last destinations

1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destinations".

Special destinations

You can search for a special destination, e.g. a hotel or place of interest, and start destination guidance to the corresponding location.

The scope of information provided depends on the particular set of navigation data you are using.

Opening the search for special destinations

1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"

The search can be narrowed by entering the location and type of special destination.

Special destination location

Search for a special destination according to its location relative to a locality or route.

1. "Search area"

Points of Interest Search area? (At destination Across all categories Several category details Start search Name, A-Z search

1. Select the location where the system is to search for the special destination:

▶ "At current location"
▶ "At destination"
"At a different destination"
"Along route"

Special destination category

1. "Category"
2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g. hotels or restaurants.

Category details

For some special destinations, additional details can be displayed that are available in the navigation data, e.g. Italian-style restaurant.

"Category details"

Points of Interest At current location HOTEL/MOTEL Category details ? (Multiple...) Start search Name, A-Z search

Starting the search for special destinations

1. "Start search"
2. A list of the special destinations is displayed.

"At current location"
Special destinations are listed according to their distance from the current location and are displayed with a directional arrow pointing to the destination.
"At destination", "At a different destination", "Along route"
Special destinations are listed according to their distance from the location where the search is being performed.
Destinations of the selected category are displayed in the map view as symbols. The display depends on the map scale and the category.

1. Highlight a special destination: the destination is displayed in the preview map.

2. Select the special destination.

3. Select the symbol.

4. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.". If a phone number is available, a connection can be established, if desired.

Destination entry via BMW Assist\*

A connection is established to the BMW Concierge service, refer to page 185.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"

Special destinations, entering by name

1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. "Name, A-Z search"
4. Enter the letters.
   Depending on the distance, the search may take some time. The list can contain a maximum of 100 entries.
5. Change to the list of special destinations.
6. Highlight a special destination: the destination is displayed in the preview map.
7. Select the special destination.
8. Select the symbol.
9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Displaying special destinations in the map

To display symbols of the special destinations in the map:

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"

Options Split screen Switch off control display Map Settings Display Points of Interest Traffic Info categories Navigation

1. Select the settings.

Entering the destination via the map

If you only know the location of the town or street, you can enter the destination using the map.

Opening the map

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
   A map section is displayed on the Control Display. The map shows the current position of the vehicle.

Selecting the destination

1. Select the symbol. "Interactive map" is started.

12:54 Interactive map 800 ft.

1. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

To change the scale: turn the controller.
To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.
To shift the map diagonally: move the controller in the required direction and turn it.

1. Press the controller to display additional menu items.

Select the symbol: "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

▷ "Return": go back to the map view.

"Find points of interest": the search for special destinations is begun.

Specifying the street

If the system cannot recognize a street, it displays a street name in the vicinity or the coordinates of the destination.

Interactive map

In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted and the visible map section can be shifted. In

addition, pressing the controller makes further functions available:

Selected position 48°08'10"O 11°34'36"N Exit interactive map View in northern direction Display destination Display current location Find points of interest

Select the symbol and "Start guidance" if necessary.
"Exit interactive map"
▶ Map view
"Display destination" The map section around the destination is displayed.
"Display current location" The map section around your current location is displayed.
"Find points of interest", refer to page 124.

Entering a destination by voice commands\*

General information

You can enter a desired destination via the voice activation system. During the destination input, you can switch between voice entry and entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice activation system if necessary.

You can have the possible commands read aloud via >Voice commands<.

Saying the entries

Countries, towns and cities, streets and intersections can be said as whole words or spelled in the system language, refer to page 79.

Example: to enter a destination in a US state as a complete word, the system language must be English.

The town/city, street and house number can be said as a single sentence.*
▶ Spell the entry if the language region and the system language differ.
Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exaggerating the pronunciation and inserting lengthy pauses between the letters.

Entering an address\*

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

1. Enter address<

2. Wait for a request from the system.

3. Say the town or city, street and house number in a single sentence.
4. Continue making the entry as prompted by the system.
5. If necessary, individually name the separate components of the address, e.g. the town/city.

Entering a town/city

The town/city can be spelled or entered as a complete word*.

The methods of entry depend on the navigation data in use and the country and image settings.

1. City< or >Spell city<

2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the town/city.

3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at least the first three letters.

Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cities may be suggested.

1. Select a location:

To select a recommended town/city:

Yes<
To select other town/city: 'New entry'
To select an entry: e.g. >Entry 2
To spell an entry: >Spell city

Identical-sounding towns/cities that cannot be distinguished by the system are

compiled in a separate list and shown as a town/city followed by three dots.

If necessary, select this entry with >Yes>. Then select the desired town/city from that list.

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: turn the controller until the town/city is selected and press the controller.

Entering a street or intersection

The street or intersection is entered in the same manner as the town/city.

Entering a house number

You can enter house numbers up to 999:

1. House number

2. Say the house number.

3. Yes< to confirm the house number.

4. Accept destination

Starting destination guidance

Start guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

Adding further intermediate destinations

Add as another destination

Further intermediate destinations can be added.

Storing destinations

The destination is automatically added to the list of last destinations.

Planning a trip

New trip

Various intermediate destinations can be entered for a trip.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. Select the symbol.
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry and enter the intermediate destination.

New destination Enter address using: Enter address Address book Last destinations Points of Interest Interactive map

1. Enter the intermediate destination.
2. "Start guidance"

Enter the intermediate destination

A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can be entered for one trip.

1. "Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry and enter the intermediate destination.

New destination Enter address using: Enter address Address book Last destinations Points of Interest Interactive map

1. Select "Add as another dest.".
2. Select the location where the intermediate destination is to be inserted.

Starting the trip

After all intermediate destinations have been entered:

"Start guidance"

Storing a trip

Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the trip list.

1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the letters.
4. "OK"

The trip is stored in the trip list under the entered name.

Starting a stored trip

1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. "Start guidance"

Trips, changing

Changing the trip direction

Intermediate destinations can be displayed in reverse order after destination guidance is started.

1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Rearranging the intermediate destinations

1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
5. "Reposition dest. in the trip"

Deleting an intermediate destination

1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
5. "Delete dest. in the trip"

Deleting a trip

1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".

Word-matching principle

The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of towns or streets. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data stored in the vehicle as the basis for instant response. The benefits for you include:

Names of towns entered may differ from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another country.

Example:

Instead of the German spelling "München" you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".

When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous identification.
The system offers only those letters for selection of name entries that are stored in the vehicle. Thus, entry of erroneous or unregistered names is impossible.

Destination guidance

Starting destination guidance

1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Accept destination"
5. "Start guidance"

The route is displayed on the Control Display after it is calculated.

In the map view, the distance from the destination/intermediate destination and the estimated arrival time are displayed.

Terminating destination guidance

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"

Continuing destination guidance

If the destination was not reached during the last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.

"Resume guidance"

Route criteria

General information

You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like during destination entry or during destination guidance.

The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing route criteria

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
   "Fast route": time-optimized route, which is a combination of the shortest possible distance and the fastest roads
   "Efficient route": optimized combination of the fastest roads and shortest route
   "Short route": short distance without taking time into account
   "Alternative routes": other suggested alternative routes while destination guidance is active

Route preference ✓ Fast route Efficient route Short route 10:17 44 km Alternative routes 10:24 36 km 10:27 50 km

1. Select additional route criteria, if desired. Where possible, the selected criteria will be avoided on the route.

Avoid highways where possible: "Avoid highways"

Avoid toll roads where possible: "Avoid toll roads"

Avoid ferries where possible: "Avoid ferries"

The setting applies to the current route and to the planning of future routes.

Dynamic destination guidance

"Dynamic guidance" is switched on: The route is automatically changed in the event of traffic obstructions. The system does not point out traffic obstructions along the original route.

Depending on the type of road and the nature and length of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated so that you travel through the traffic obstruction.

Activating Dynamic destination guidance

1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"

If the route criteria "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads", or "Avoid ferries" are selected, route calculation may take longer.

Route

General information

Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, various views of the route are available during destination guidance.

List of streets and towns/cities
▶ Map view, refer to page 132

Displaying a list of the streets or towns/cities on the route

When destination guidance is started, a list of the streets and towns/cities on the route is displayed. The driving distances and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.

The section is displayed in the preview map.

Bypassing a section of the route

During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"

Route information New route for MAX-VON-GRU ... 0.1 km PARZIVALSTRA ... 0.3 km PARZIVALPLATZ 0.1 km LEOPOLDSTRA ... 0.8 km EDUARD-SCHE ... 0.4 km TORQUATO TA ... 0.0 km

1. Turn the controller: enter the desired number of miles.
2. Press the controller.

Resuming the original route

If the route section should no longer be bypassed:

1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Remove blocking"

Gas station recommendations

The remaining range is calculated and gas stations along the route are recommended.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel" A list of filling stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Destination guidance through voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off

Voice instructions can be switched on or off during destination guidance.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.

Symbol Meaning

	Voice instructions are switched on
	Voice instructions are switched off

For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a programmable memory key, refer to page 20.

Repeating a voice instruction

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.

Adjusting the volume of voice instructions\*

The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.

1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Map view

Displaying the map view

You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
   The following functions are directly available in the map view:

Symbol Function

	Starting/stopping destination guidance
	Switching voice instructions on/off
	Changing route criteria or selecting route alternatives
	Special destinations
	Displaying traffic bulletins
	Interactive map
	Map view settings
	Changing scale

Information in the map view

Time, entertainment source, sound output, map orientation
Distance from destination/intermediate destination, estimated time of arrival, if destination guidance is active.
Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in color.

To show/hide information on the map: Press the controller.

Viewing the map

1. Select the symbol.

2. Select a setting:

"View facing north"
"View in dir. of travel"
"Perspective view"
"Arrow display"

1. Press the controller.

Changing the map section

Select "Interactive map".

To shift the map: move the controller in the required direction.
To shift the map diagonally: move the controller in the required direction and turn it.

Changing scale

1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.

Automatic scaling of the map

In the map view facing north, turn the controller in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the map scale.

The map shows the entire range from your location to the destination.

Settings for the map view

The map is shown on the Control Display.

1. Open "Options".

2. "Settings"

3. Set the optimized map view.

"Day/night mode" Select and apply the necessary settings depending on the light conditions. If the "Traffic conditions/gray map" is activated, this setting is not taken into account.

"Satellite images" Depending on the availability and resolution, satellite images* are displayed in scales of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/2 km to 1,000 km.

"Perspective view in 3D" Displays a three-dimensional view. Prominent areas that are contained in the navigation data are displayed on the map in 3D.
"Traffic conditions/gray map" The map is optimized for displaying traffic bulletins. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

Map view for the split screen display

The map view for the split screen can be selected separately from the main screen.

1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen" ☑ The split screen is switched on.
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly until the split screen content is selected.
4. Select the map view:

"Arrow display"

"Map facing north"

"Map direction of travel"

▶ "Map view with perspective"

"Exit ramp view"

Changing scale

1. Move the controller to the right until the split screen is selected.
2. Turn the controller.

Traffic bulletins\*

You can display the traffic bulletins from radio stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic information service. This information from the traffic information service is continuously updated on the basis of measurement data from traffic control centers and information on traffic congestion. During destination guidance, traffic bulletins that are relevant to areas along the route are automatically displayed and taken into account in the route planning. You can open all traffic bulletins manually via iDrive.

The traffic bulletins are shown in the map view.

Real Time Traffic Information End-User Provisions

Certain BMW models equipped with navigation have the capability to display real-time traffic information. If your system has this capability the following additional terms and conditions apply:

An End-User shall no longer have the right to use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-User is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein.

A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Network") holds the rights to the traffic incident data and RDS-TMC network through which it is delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or use any other method to reproduce, duplicate, republish, transmit or distribute in any way any portion of traffic incident data. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates) against any and all claims, damages, costs or other expenses that arise directly or indirectly out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection herewith.

B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers make no representations about content, traffic and road conditions, route usability, or speed. C. The licensed material is provided to license "as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network, including, but not limited to, any and all third party providers of any of the licensed material, expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations with respect to the licensed material (including, without limitation, that the licensed material will be error-free, will operate without interruption or that the traffic data will be accurate), express, implied or statutory, including, without limitation, the implied warranties of merchantability, non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-

pose, or those arising from a course of dealing or usage of trade.

D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect, special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental damages (including, without limitation, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating to the same) arising from any claim relating directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data, and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you.

Activating/deactivating reception

1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".

Traffic bulletins in a list

A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via the menu or map view.

Opening traffic bulletins

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. Select the symbol: "Traffic Info" First, the traffic bulletins on the planned route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are sorted in the order of their distance from the current vehicle position.
5. Select a traffic bulletin.

Additional information can be displayed for some traffic bulletins:

1. Select the symbol.
2. Additional information is displayed.
3. To exit from the menu: Move the controller to the left.

Traffic bulletins in the map

When the traffic bulletin map is activated, the Control Display changes to a grayscale display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins. The day/night mode is disregarded in this setting. The symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"

Symbols in the map view

Depending on the scale of the map and the location of the traffic obstruction along the route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions are displayed.

Additional information in the map view

Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruction's length, direction and impact are displayed on the map using triangles or gray bars along the calculated route. The colors displayed depend on the information transmitted by the traffic information service.

Red: traffic jam
Orange: stop-and-go traffic
Yellow: heavy traffic
Green: traffic flowing freely
Gray: general traffic information, e.g. construction zone

Filtering of traffic bulletins

You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be displayed by the system:

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".

4. "Traffic Info categories"

5. Select the desired categories.

Categories ✓ Traffic flow ✓ Roadwork ✓ Closed roads ✓ Traffic disruptions

Traffic bulletins of the selected categories are displayed.

Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route are always displayed.
For your own safety, traffic bulletins that notify you of potentially dangerous situations, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be hidden.

Traffic bulletins during destination guidance

System response will vary depending on whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected, refer to page 131.

During destination guidance, traffic obstructions on the route are taken into consideration. Information on sources of great danger, such as wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of the setting.

Displaying traffic obstructions

When the navigation system receives a traffic obstruction message and "Dynamic guidance" is not selected, you will be shown certain information, such as the length of the traffic jam, when you are approx. 30 miles/50 km away from the traffic obstruction.

The last possible detour exit is indicated just before you reach it.

This information is displayed even if you have called up another application on the Control Display.

Selecting a detour

Select the symbol: "Detour".

"Dynamic guidance" is activated for the current destination guidance.

Dynamic route planning

When "Dynamic guidance" is selected, the route will be changed automatically in the event of a traffic obstruction. The system will not point out traffic obstructions on the original route. Depending on the road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the newly calculated route may lead through the traffic obstruction.

What to do if ...

What to do if ...

The current position cannot be displayed? The position is in an unrecognized region, in a poor reception area, or the system is in the process of determining the position. Reception is generally available when you are in the open.

The destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name?

A downtown area cannot be determined for the town or city that has been entered. Input any street in the selected town/city and start destination guidance.

The destination guidance does not accept a destination?

The destination data is not contained in the navigation data. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.

The letters for a destination cannot be selected during destination entry?

The stored data do not contain the data of the destination. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

The map view is displayed in grayscale?

When the traffic bulletin map is activated, the Control Display changes to a grayscale display. This enables a better view of the traffic bulletins.

Voice instructions are no longer issued before intersections during destination guidance?

The area has not been fully recorded yet, or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route suggestion.

Black-and-white photo of hands playing piano keys, no visible text or symbols on the keys or background

Entertainment Operation of the radio, CD equipment and external audio devices as well as their tone settings are described in this chapter. Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 129 - © 02/10 BMW AG

On/off and tone

The following audio and video sources share the same control elements and adjustments:

Radio

CD/DVD player

CD changer*

Video*

External devices, e.g. MP3 player

Controls

The audio and video sources can be controlled using the:

▶ Buttons near the CD/DVD player

iDrive

▶ Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10

Programmable memory keys, refer to page 20

Voice activation system

Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD player

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, volume

Press: switch on/off When you switch on the unit, the last set radio station or track is played.

Turn: adjusting the volume

2 Eject the CD/DVD

3 CD/DVD drive *

4 F M / A M : change the radio station wave-band

5 MODE : change the audio and video sources

6 Station scan/track search

Change the radio station

Select the track for the CD/DVD player, CD changer and certain multimedia devices

Switching on/off

To switch the entertainment audio output on or off:

Press button 1 next to the CD/DVD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indicates that sound output is switched off.

The sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes after the ignition was switched off. For sound output, switch the unit back on.

Adjusting volume

Turn button 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the desired volume is obtained.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

Tone control

You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase.

The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Treble, bass, balance, fader

▶ "Balance": left/right volume distribution

▶ "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Adjustments

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"

Radio FM AM Satellite radio Presets ✓ Tone

1. Select the desired tone setting.

Tone Treble - ###### + Hass - + Balance L R Fader F R Equalizer Surround Volume settings

1. To adjust: turn the controller.
2. To store: press the controller.

Equalizer\*

You can set individual sound frequency ranges.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.

Equalizer 100 Hz - + + 200 Hz - + + 500 Hz - + + 1 kHz - + + 2 kHz - + + 5 kHz - + + 10 kHz - + +

1. To adjust: turn the controller.
2. To store: press the controller.

Multi-channel playback, surround\*

You can choose between stereo and multi-channel playback, surround.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Surround"

Tone Treble Hass Balance Fader Equalizer ✓ Surround Volume settings

Multi-channel playback, surround, is simulated when playing back an audio track in stereo.

Surround is automatically activated or deactivated, depending on the audio track selected.

Volume

"Speed volume": adjustment of the output volume depending on the driving speed
"PDC": volume of the PDC signal tone relative to the entertainment sound output
"Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for the "Fasten safety belts" reminder, relative to the entertainment sound output

Adjustments

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.

Volume settings Speed volume Volume setting: PDC Gong

1. To adjust: turn the controller.
2. To store: press the controller.

Resetting tone settings

You can reset all tone settings to the default setting.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"

Radio

Your radio is designed for reception of the following stations:

FM and AM
HD Radio*
Satellite radio*

Selecting a station

Interior view of a car dashboard with air filters and a control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button if the sound output is switched off.

1. "Radio"

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

1. "FM" or "AM"
2. Select the desired station.

FM Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96.3 ✓ KLASSIK 100.0 MHz 101.3 MHz

The selected station is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Changing stations

Turn the controller and press it

or

press the button for the corresponding direction

or

press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.

Selecting a station manually

Station selection using the frequency.

1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.

FM manual 96 98 100 94 102 92 MHz 93.3 90 104 88 106 108

To store the station: press the controller for an extended period.

Storing stations

Via iDrive

1. "Radio"

2. "FM" or "AM"

3. Select the desired station.

FM Manual CARIVARI ENERGY GONG96.3 ✓ Klassik 100.0 MHz 101.3 MHz

1. Press the controller for an extended period.
2. Select the desired memory location.

The stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via programmable memory keys

You can store a station on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 20.

1. Select a station.
2. Press and hold the desired

button

Radio Data System RDS\*

In the FM waveband, additional information is transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names appear in the display.

Switching the RDS on/off

1. "Radio"
2. "FM"

3. Open "Options".

4. "RDS"

Options Split screen Switch off control display FM HD RDS

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

HD Radio™ reception\*

Many stations broadcast both analog and digital signals. If a digital radio network is available, these stations can be received digitally and thus with better sound quality.

License conditions

HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

Switching digital radio reception on/off

1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

H) This symbol is displayed when a station is received digitally.

In areas in which the station is not continuously received in digital mode, playback switches between analog and digital reception. Any time shift between these two broadcasts can lead to repetitions or interruptions in the output. In this case, switch off digital radio reception.

Displaying additional information

Some stations broadcast additional information on the current track, such as the name of the artist.

1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"

Selecting a substation

The symbol indicates that a main station includes additional substations. The station name of the main station ends with HD1. Station names of substations end with HD2, HD3, etc.

1. Select the desired station.
2. press the controller.
3. Select the substation.

In the event of poor reception, the substation is muted for several seconds. If reception is interrupted for a longer period of time, then the system switches back to the main station.

Presets

It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Calling up a station

1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.

Storing a station

The station currently selected is stored.

1. "Radio"

2. "Presets"

3. "Store station"

Presets Store station 1 Hit Radio FM 2 Classic Radio FM 3 Chart Radio FM 4 News Radio FM

1. Select the desired memory location.

The list of stored stations is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can also store the stations on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 20.

Deleting a station

1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"

Satellite radio\*

General information

The channels are offered in predefined packages. The packages must be enabled by telephone.

Navigation bar overview

Symbol Function

	Changing the list view
	Selecting a category
	Direct channel entry
	Timeshift
☆	Opening the favorites, opening the My Favorites category
☆	Managing the favorites
○	Traffic Jump

The functions of the navigation bar symbols can also be stored on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Managing a subscription

To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the channels, you must have reception. It is usually at its best when you have an unobstructed view of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the status line.

Enabling the channels

The Unsubscribed Channels category contains all disabled channels.

1. "Radio"

2. "Satellite radio"

3. "Category"
   

Satellite radio Category Snow Patrol Chasing Cars All channels 001 Sirius Hits 1 ✓ 002 StarLite 003 Sirius Love 004 Movin EZ

1. Select the Unsubscribed Channels category.
2. Select the desired channel. The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.
3. Select the phone number to have the channel enabled.

Subscribe to Sirius Call Sirius to subscribe. ESN: 020-373-171411 1-308-539-518135

You can also unsubscribe from the channels via this phone number.

Unsubscribing from channels

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".

4. "Manage subscription"

Options Split screen Switch off control display Satellite radio Manage subscription Set jump

The phone number and an electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

1. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the channels.

Selecting a channel

You can only listen to enabled channels.

The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Via iDrive

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired category.
4. Select the desired channel.

Satellite radio Snow Patrol Chasing Cars All channels 001 Sirius Hits 1 ✓ 002 StarLite 003 Sirius Love 004 MovIn EZ

Via the button in the area of the CD/DVD player

Press the button for the corresponding direction.

The next channel is selected.

Via direct channel entry

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Select channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel is reached and press the controller.

Storing a channel

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "All channels" or the desired category as needed.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the highlighted channel.

Store Store in presets 001 Sirius Hits 1 Store in favorites The Fray; Over My Head (Cable...

1. Select the desired memory location.

The channels are stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can also store the channels on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 20.

Changing the list view

The list view changes every time the first symbol on the navigation bar is pressed.

Information on the channel is displayed.

Symbol Function

	Channel name
	Artist
	Track

Selecting a category

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.

Timeshift

Approx. one hour of the program being broadcast on the channel currently being listened to is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal must be available.

The stored audio track can be played with a delay following the live broadcast. When the buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten. The buffer is cleared when a new channel is selected.

Opening the timeshift function

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"

Replay - Time shift Snow Patrol Chasing Cars 407

The red arrow shows the current playback position.
The time difference to the live broadcast is displayed next to the buffer bar.
With a live broadcast: "live".

Timeshift menu

Symbol Function

	Go to the live broadcast
	Playback/pause
	Next track

Symbol Function

	Previous track
	Fast forward
	Reverse
	Automatic Timeshift deactivated/activated

Automatic Timeshift

With the function activated, the audio playback is automatically stopped when:

there are incoming and outgoing phone calls.
the voice activation system is activated.
muting function is activated.

The audio playback continues after a time delay.

Activating

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"

Deactivating

"Automatic time shift"

Storing favorites

Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites list. Available favorites are artist, track, game, league and team.

Storing the artist, track or game

It is only possible to store favorites that are currently being broadcast. The channel information must be available.

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select the desired channel.
4. Press the controller again.

5. Select the artist, track or game.

6. Select "All channels" or the desired category.

Storing the league or team

Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites from a selection list.

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"

Favorites ✓ Activate alert

Artists

✓ The Fray:

Titles

✓ Proud Mary (1969) ✓ Livin' On A Prayer (1987) Add sports information

1. Select the desired league.
2. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.

Opening the favorites

When an activated favorite is playing, the following message appears for approx. 20 seconds: "Favorite alert!".

Select ★"Favorites" while the message is being displayed.

Satellite radio Favorite alert! Proud Mary (1969) All Channels 001 Sirius Hits 1 002 StarLite 003 Sirius Love 004 Movin EZ

The displayed favorite is played.

If there is no message, the system changes to the My Favorites category. All favorites currently being broadcast can be selected from a list.

Managing the favorites

Activating/deactivating the favorites

Favorites can be activated and deactivated globally and individually.

1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favorite.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Deleting favorites

1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"

Traffic Jump

Traffic and weather information for a selected region is broadcast every few minutes.

Selecting a region

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.

The region is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Activating/deactivating the jump

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
   Information for the selected region is broadcast as soon as it is available.
   A new panel opens.

Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".

Symbol Meaning

Information will be broadcast shortly.

Information is currently being broadcast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic Jump.

Automatic update

About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of the channel names and positions. The update takes place automatically and may take several minutes.

Notes

▶ Reception may not be available in some situations, such as under certain environmental or topographic conditions. The satellite radio cannot influence this.
The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to tall buildings or near trees, mountains or other powerful sources of radio interference.

CD/DVD player and CD changer\*

CD/DVD playback

Interior view of a car dashboard with air filters and control buttons (no visible text or symbols)

Inserting a CD/DVD

Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled side facing up. The CD/DVD is drawn in automatically.

Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, it can take several minutes to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.

playable formats

CD/DVD player

DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD audio (video part only), DVD video
CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD
Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC CD changer*
CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA

Starting playback

Via iDrive

Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer to page 155.

To start playback if a CD is already located in the player or changer:

1. "CD/Multimedia"

Main menu CD/Multimedia Radio Telephone Navigation Contacts BMW Assist Vehicle Info Settings

1. "CD/DVD"

2. Select the desired CD or DVD:

CD/DVD ✓ Best off Brothers in arms CD-Rom Mezzanine Reload Beautiful Black Market Music

Ejecting a CD/DVD

Press the button next to the CD/DVD player. The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

Symbol Function

CD/DVD player

CD changer

Audio playback

Selecting a track using the button

Press the button for the appropriate direction as often as necessary until the desired track is reached.

Selecting a track using iDrive

Audio CDs

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Audio CD Bruce Springsteen Magic D0:28 D1/14 Store in vehicle Nowhere You'll Be Comin' Down Living In The Future

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files\*

Depending on the data, some letters and numbers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed correctly.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary. To change to a higher level directory: move the controller to the left.

Sanitana Supernatural 00:38 223/249 Prince ✓ Santana Sportfreunde Stiller Tom Jones

1. Select a track and press the controller.

Sanmina Supernatural 00:08 • 223/249 Store in vehicle (Da Le) Yaleo ✓ Africa Bamba Corazon Espinado (Fe...

Displaying information about the track\*

If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

Santana Supernatural 00:38 223/249 Prince ✓ Santana Sportfreunde Stiller Tom Jones

Artist
Album title
Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
Track file name

Random play sequence

The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played once in random sequence.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".

5. "Random"

Options Split screen Switch off control display CD/Multimedia Random Music data import/export

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the directories and the tracks contained therein are played back in random sequence.

Random mode is switched off when the audio source is changed or the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

Automatic repeat\*

Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are repeated automatically.

Video playback\*

Country codes

Only DVDs with the code of the home region can be played back; also refer to the information on your DVD.

Code Region

1	U	S	A	,
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South Africa
3	S	o	u	t
4 Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand
5	N	o	r	t
6	C	h	i	n
0	A	l	l	r

Starting playback

For your own safety, the video image is only displayed up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, and in some market-specific versions, only with the parking brake engaged or the selector lever in position P.

DVD video

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"

DVD menu

1. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

VCD/SVCD

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
   The CD/DVD is started.

Video menu C

To open the Video menu:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.
The Video menu is displayed:

Symbol w Function e s t DVB Open the DVD menu* e g Starting i n Starting playback o II Pause

Symbol Function

□	Stop
▷	Next chapter/next track
◀	Previous chapter/previous track
▷	Fast forward
◀	Reverse

In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases every time the controller is pressed. To stop, start playback.

DVD menu

1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the Video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
   The DVD menu is displayed. The display depends on the contents of the DVD.
   To select menu items: move and press the controller.
   To change to the Video menu: turn the controller and select "Back".

DVD/VCD settings

For some DVDs, settings can only be made via the DVD menu; refer also to the information on your DVD.

Language\*

1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"

Switch off control display DVD video Audio/language Subtitles Display settings Additional options CD/Multimedia

1. Select the desired language.

The languages that are available depend on the DVD.

Subtitles\*

Subtitles can be selected if they are contained on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or 'Do not display subtitles'.

Subtitles Do not display subtitles ✓ German English

Brightness, contrast, color

1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

Display settings Brightness Contrast Color

1. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed, and then press the controller.

Zoom

Display the video image on the full screen.

1. Open "Options".
2. "Additional options"

3. "Zoom mode"

4. Turn the controller during playback.

Options Zoom mode Select title Viewing angle Main menu Back

Selecting track

DVD video:

1. turn the controller when the DVD menu is displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.

VCD/SVCD:

1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.

Camera angle\*

The camera angle depends on the DVD.

1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.

Opening the main menu, back

These functions are not contained on every DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for use.

CD changer\*

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the left side panel in the cargo area.

Close-up of a computer monitor with an inserted slot and a magnified view showing the screen (no text or symbols visible)

Removing the CD magazine

To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine, you must first remove it from the CD changer:

Two views of a black rectangular device with internal components, showing front and side views (no text or symbols visible)

1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2. The CD magazine will be ejected.
   Push the magazine back in after at least 2 seconds have passed so that the inserted CDs can be read in again.

Inserting/removing CDs from the CD magazine

Illustration of a compact CD or DVD drive with an open disc and a paper clip, no text or symbols present.

When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.

Inserting CDs:

Insert one CD per compartment with the labeled side up.

Removing CDs:

Pull out the desired compartment and take out the CD.

Inserting the CD magazine

INSERT IN THIS DIRECTION 2

Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direction of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.

The CD changer automatically reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.

Notes

BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can result.

Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device.

Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles; otherwise, the CDs or the adapter might jam and no longer eject.

Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD ^Plus ; otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.

General malfunctions

BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity

High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs

If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/DVDs, this may be due to one of the following reasons.

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs

Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-recorded CDs/DVDs are, for example, inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or old age of the CD/DVD blank.

Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.

Damage

Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.

Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.

Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures above 122 °F/50 °C, nor to high humidity levels or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection

CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/

DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION

This product contains copyrighted technology that is based on multiple registered U.S. patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers. The use of this copy protection must be approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise agreed with Macrovision, media with this protection may only be used for private purposes. Copying of this technology is prohibited.

DTS Digital Surround™

Manufactured under license of US patent numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other patents granted and pending in both the USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.

Music collection

Storing music

The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB devices can be stored in the music collection in the vehicle and played from there.

Audio CD: tracks are converted into a compressed audio format when they are stored. If available, information on the album, such as the artist, is stored as well.
CD/DVD or USB device with compressed audio files: the entire content of the CD/DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. After storing, the tracks and directories can be deleted individually. Files are only stored in the WMA, MP3, and AAC formats.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be stored in the vehicle but cannot be played back.

Regularly back up the music data; otherwise, it could be lost if there is a fault on hard disk.

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by

Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. This product and service may make use of one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6,240,459 and 6,330,593 as well as other granted or pending patents. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Storing files from CDs/DVDs

CDs/DVDs can only be stored from the CD/DVD player.

1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
5. "Store in vehicle"

Audio CD Unknown artist Unknown album 00:28 01/14 Store in vehicle Title 01 Title 02 Title 03

The music collection is displayed.

The tracks are stored and played back in sequence from the music collection.

Observe the following during the storage process:

Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD player; otherwise, the storage process will be interrupted.

You can switch to the other audio sources without interrupting the storage process. Tracks from the current CD/DVD can also be called up, if they have been stored already.

Interrupting storage

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "CD/DVD"

3. "Storing..."

CD/DVD Storing... Best off Brothers in arms Mezzanine Audio CD Reload Beautiful

1. "Cancel storing"

The storage process is interrupted and can be continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD player.
4. "Continue storing"

Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of the track at which storage was interrupted.

Album information

During storage, information such as the name of the artist is stored with the track, if this information is available in the vehicle database or on the CD.

To update the database, contact your service center.

Storing from a USB device

To store music, a suitable device must be connected to the USB interface in the glove compartment.

Suitable devices: USB mass storage devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3 players with a USB interface.
Unsuitable devices: USB hard drive, USB hubs, USB memory card readers with multiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.

Music from a USB device can be stored only via the USB interface in the glove compartment.

1. Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"

Import/export (USB) Import music (USB) Music collection management Backup music on USB Restore music from USB

Playing music

Music search

All tracks for which additional information has been stored can be accessed by the music search. Tracks without additional information can be called up via the corresponding album.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"

Music collection Music search Current playback Top 50 Audio-CD 1 Frank USB 1 LIEBLINGSSONGS

1. Select the desired category.

Music search Genre? (All genres) All artists All albums All titles Start play New search

1. To select the desired entry:

Open "A-Z search" and input the desired entry.

or

▶ Select the desired entry from the list.

1. Select additional categories if desired.

The tracks found are listed in alphabetical order.

Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to search for all tracks by a certain artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

1. "Start play"

Restarting the music search

"New search"

Music search by voice\*

For instructions on the voice activation system, refer to page 22.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

1. Music search

2. Open the desired category, e.g. 'Select artist'.
3. Say the desired entry in the list.
4. Select additional categories if desired.

To select a track directly:

Title ...<

Say the voice command and the name of the desired track in one sentence.

Current playback

The list of tracks that was generated last by the music search or the album selected last.

1. "Current playback"

Music collection Music search Current playback Top 50 Audio-CD 1 Frank USB 1 LIEBLINGSSONGS

1. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Top 50

List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Albums

All stored albums, listed in order of their storage dates. Symbols indicate the format.

Symbol Format

Audio CD

Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.

Music collection Music search Current playback Top 50 Audio-CD 1 Hits Frank LIEBLINGSSONGS

Depending on the album, the tracks or the subdirectories of the album are displayed. The first track is played automatically, if possible.

1. To select tracks, change directories if needed. To go up one level in the directory, move the controller to the left.

Random play sequence

All tracks of the selection are played back in random order.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"

Options Free memory Delete music collection CD/Multimedia Random Music data import/export

Managing music

Albums

Renaming an album

The name of the album, if available, is automatically entered when the album is stored. If the name is unknown, it can be changed later.

An album cannot be renamed while a track from that album is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.

4. Open "Options".

5. "Rename album"

Options Audio-CD 1 Rename album Delete album Music collection Music data import/export Free memory Delete music collection

1. Select the letters individually.

Deleting an album

An album cannot be deleted while a track from it is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"

Deleting a track or directory

A track cannot be deleted while it is being played.

A directory cannot be deleted while a track from it is being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. Delete track "Delete folder" o

Free memory capacity

Display the free memory capacity in the music collection.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"

Music collection

Backing up the music collection

The entire music collection can be stored on a USB medium. Make sure there is enough free memory capacity on the USB device.

Depending on the number of tracks, backing up the music collection may take several hours.

Therefore, it is best to perform the backup during a long trip.

1. Start the engine.
2. Connect the USB medium to the USB interface in the glove compartment, refer to page 104.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"

Options Free memory Delete music collection CD/Multimedia Random Music data import/export

1. "Backup music on USB"

Import/export (USB) Import music (USB) Music collection management Backup music on USB Restore music from USB

Restoring the music collection in the vehicle

When storing from the USB device, the music collection existing in the vehicle is replaced.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"

External devices

At a glance

Symbol Meaning

AUX-IN port

USB audio interface*/audio inter-face mobile phone*

AUX-IN port

You can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone using iDrive.

Connecting

Lift up the center armrest.

Interior view of a car with a visible seatbelt and control panel (no text or symbols)

Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm.

To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, connect the headset or line-out port of the external device to the AUX-IN port.

Starting audio playback

Connect the audio device, switch it on and select a track. Operate the system on the audio device.

Via iDrive

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If applicable, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"

Adjusting the volume

The volume of the sound output depends on the audio device. If this volume differs markedly from the volume of the other audio sources, it is advisable to adjust the volumes.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If applicable, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"

AUX front AUX active Volume - 100000 +

1. Turn the controller until the desired volume is set and then press the controller.

USB audio interface\*/ extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone\*

It is possible to connect external audio devices/mobile phones. They can be operated via iDrive. Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Options for connecting external devices

Connection via USB audio interface: Apple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player, USB flash drive, or mobile phones that are supported by the USB audio interface.
Connection via snap-in adapter*, refer to page 170, when equipped with additional connection of music player in the mobile phone: Apple iPhone/mobile phones. Play-

back is possible only if no audio device/mobile phone is connected to the USB audio interface.

Due to the large number of different audio devices/mobile phones available on the market, it cannot be ensured that every audio device/mobile phone is operable on the vehicle. Ask about suitable audio devices/mobile phones at your BMW center.

Audio files

The system can play standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM), and AAC, as well as playlists in the M3U format.

Connecting via USB audio interface

Lift up the center armrest.

1 AUX IN 2

1 AUX-IN port for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm.

2 USB interface

Apple iPod/iPhone

To connect the device, use the special cable adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available from your BMW center. The cable adapter is required for a flawless connection.

Using the Apple iPod/iPhone cable adapter, connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the AUX-IN port 1 and USB interface 2.

The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is supported by the USB audio interface.

USB device

When connecting the device use a flexible adapter cable, to protect the USB

interface and your USB device against physical damage.

Connect the USB device to connector 2, using a flexible adapter cable.

After the device is connected for the first time, the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of music) and the playlists are transferred from the USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may take some time. The duration depends on the USB device and the number of tracks.

During transmission, the tracks can be called up via the file directory.

Information from up to four USB devices can be stored in the vehicle, or a total of about 16,000 tracks.

If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than 16,000 tracks are stored, information on existing tracks may be deleted.

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be

played.

Starting audio playback

If the audio device has a device name, the name is displayed.

1. "CD/Multimedia"

2. "External devices"

3. Select the symbol.

The name of the audio device may appear.

External devices JUKEBOX Not active

Playback begins with the first track. When an Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in adapter and an audio device is connected to the AUX-IN port at the same time, the audio signal of the AUX-IN port is played.

Information about the track

If information about a track has been stored, it is displayed automatically:

Artist
Album title
Number of tracks
Track file name

Track search

Selection is possible via:

▶ Playback lists
Information: type of music, artist, album, title
Additionally for USB devices: file directory, composer

Track titles are displayed if they have been stored in the Latin alphabet.

Starting the track search

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.

The name of the audio device may appear.

1. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Artist".

USB audio: JUKEBOX Browse directory Genre? (All genres) All artists All composers All albums All tracks Start play

All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z search" can be used to find specific entries.

Open "A-Z search" and input the desired entry. When a character is entered, a filter is applied using this character as the first letter. When several characters are entered, all results are

displayed that contain this sequence of characters.

Select the desired entry from the list.

1. Select additional categories if desired.

Not all categories need to be selected. For example, if you wish to display all of the tracks of a particular artist, then only select this artist. All of the tracks by that artist are then displayed.

1. "Start play"

Restarting a track search

"New search"

Playback lists

To open playback lists.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Playlists"

Current playback

List of tracks currently being played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Current playback"

Random play sequence

You can play the tracks in the selected list in random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse

Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.

Notes

Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g. very high temperatures, refer to the operating instructions of the audio device. Otherwise, the audio device may become damaged, which could compromise safety while driving.

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the files may not play back correctly in every case.

Notes on connecting

The connected audio device is supplied with a current of max. 500 mA, if the device supports this. Therefore, do not connect the device to the power socket in the vehicle.
Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB audio interface.
Do not connect USB hard drives.
Do not use the USB audio interface to charge external devices.

TELEPHONE TELEPHONE Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 129 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Communications

This chapter describes how to use the telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService.

Telephone\*

The concept

Your BMW is equipped with a full preparation package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile phone via the iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel or using voice commands*.

Once a mobile phone has been paired with your vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. You can store the pairing data for up to four mobile phones simultaneously. If several mobile phones are detected at the same time, the mobile phone last paired can be operated via the vehicle.

Using the telephone inside the vehicle

Using the snap-in adapter\*

The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile phone's battery and connect the mobile phone to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures better network reception and consistent reproduction quality. Please contact your BMW center to find out for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapters available.

For your safety

A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emergency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate operating instructions for a detailed description of safety precautions and information, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:

Only make entries when the traffic situation allows you to do so. Do not hold the mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do

not observe this precaution, your being distracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.

Suitable mobile phones

Please ask your BMW center which mobile phones with Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package and which mobile phones are compatible with the snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular software versions, these mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner's Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones.

Operating options

You can operate the mobile phone using:

▶ Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10
iDrive, refer to page 16
▶ Voice commands*, refer to page 177
Programmable memory keys, refer to page 20

Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may result.

Start-up

Pairing the mobile phone with the vehicle

The following prerequisites must be met:

Compatible mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the full preparation package mobile phone. You can obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth
The mobile phone is ready to operate.

Bluetooth has been activated in the vehicle, refer to page 172, and on the mobile phone.

Depending on the mobile phone, certain settings may be necessary on the mobile phone, e.g. via the following menu items:

Bluetooth switched on
▶ Connection must be allowed without requiring further confirmation
Reconnection

Depending on the mobile phone type, the power-saving mode setting, for example, may result in a paired mobile phone not being detected by the vehicle.

For pairing purposes, define any 4 to 16-digit number as a Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number offers the best protection against unauthorized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no longer required after pairing is successful.

The ignition is switched on.

Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle only when the car is stationary, to avoid endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.

Switch on ignition

1. Insert remote control all the way into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop button.

Preparation via iDrive

1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. "Add new phone"

Bluetooth (telephone) Configuration of Bluetooth telephone services Add new phone Connected: Handy 1 Paired: Handy 2 Handy 3

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.

Preparation via the mobile phone

1. Further steps must be carried out with the mobile phone and vary depending on the model. Please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions, e.g. under the topics of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking or Pairing. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears on the mobile phone display.
2. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

Pairing

Depending on your mobile phone, you will see messages, first on the mobile phone display or on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey previously determined by you.

1. Enter the Bluetooth passkey. Depending on the mobile phone, you will have approx. 30 seconds to enter your Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and the Control Display.

Enter same passkey for vehicle and bluetooths phone.

If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.

Following the initial pairing

The mobile phone is detected/connected in the vehicle within a short time if the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmitted to the vehicle. This transmis-

sion is dependent on your mobile phone, refer to the operating instructions of the mobile phone if necessary, and can take several minutes.

▶ Four mobile phones can be paired.
▶ Specific settings may be necessary in some mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a secure connection, refer to the mobile phone operating instructions.

If not all phone book entries are displayed:

Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
Phone book entries with special characters may not be displayed.

Checks to perform if pairing is unsuccessful

Is the mobile phone supported by the mobile phone preparation package? You can obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth
Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and vehicle match? The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered on the mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
Did it take you more than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then repeat the pairing procedure.
Are too many Bluetooth devices connected to the mobile phone? If so, delete the connections with other devices on the mobile phone.
Is the mobile phone no longer responding? Switch the mobile phone off and on or briefly disconnect the power supply.
Repeat the pairing procedure.
If all items on the list have been checked and the mobile phone still cannot be paired, please contact Customer Relations.

Connecting a particular mobile phone

If more than one mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the list is connected. A different mobile phone can be connected by selecting it.

1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. Select the desired mobile phone.

Bluetooth (telephone) Configuration of Bluetooth telephone services Add new phone Connected: Handy 1 Paired: Handy 2 Handy 3

Unpairing the mobile phone from the vehicle

1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"

Options Split screen Switch off control display Handy 2 Remove phone from list Telephone Bluetooth Bluetooth info

The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list.

The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are deleted as well.

Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth link

The use of Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries. Observe all applicable local regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone, if necessary. If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle, and other devices with a Bluetooth interface

can be used in combination with the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop.

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and your mobile phone:

1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth"

Options Split screen Switch off control display Telephone Bluetooth Bluetooth info

Adapting volumes

Interior view of a car dashboard with air conditioner and fan (no text or symbols visible)

Turn the knob until the desired volume is set.

Adjusting the volume for:

Ring volume
Voice volume

These volumes are maintained for the hands-free system, even if you set the other audio sources to minimum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Operation via iDrive

You can operate the following functions using iDrive:

Accepting/rejecting calls
▶ Dialing phone numbers

Selecting phone numbers from the phone book

Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of received calls

Ending a call

When the ignition is switched off or in radio readiness, e.g. after taking the remote control out of the ignition lock, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for several minutes.

Voice quality

If the person you are talking to is having difficulties understanding you, this may be due to excessive background noise. The full preparation package mobile phone can compensate for these noises to a certain extent. To optimize voice quality during a call, we recommend that you:

Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing the windows, reducing air flow from the automatic climate control or pointing the open front air vents downward.
▶ Reduce the volume of the hands-free system.

Requirements

The mobile phone's pairing data are stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone is operational.
The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
The mobile phone is recognized by the vehicle.

Receiving calls

If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone number has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.

Accepting a call

Press the button on the steering wheel or

"Accept"

Incoming call 08912345678 Accept Reject

Rejecting a call

"Reject"

The caller is connected to your mailbox if it has been activated.

Ending a call

Press the button on the steering wheel or

1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. Select an active call.

Active calls ✓ 08912345678 00:10 Hold Keypad dialing Conference call

Dialing phone numbers

1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"

3. Select the digits individually.

4. Select this symbol to establish the connection

08912

or

press the button on the steering wheel.

The phone number can also be entered using voice commands*, refer to page 177.

For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are talking to, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your provider.

Calls with multiple parties

You can switch between calls and combine two calls to a single conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone and the service provider.

Accepting a call while speaking to another party

This function depends on the service provider and may have to be enabled. The mobile phone may have to be set up accordingly.

If a second call comes in during an active call, you will hear a call waiting signal.

"Accept"

The call is accepted and the existing call is put on hold.

Establishing a second call

Establish another call during an active call.

1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"

3. "Hold"

Active calls ✓ [phone]:28 Hold Keypad dialing Conference call

The existing call is put on hold.

1. Dial the new phone number or select it from a list.

Switching between two calls, toggling

Active call: indicated by a red handset
▶ Call on hold: indicated by a green handset To switch to the call on hold, select this hand- set.

Establishing a conference call

Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call.

1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"

Active calls ✓ [phone]:29 [phone]:16 (wird gehalten...) Hold Keypad dialing Conference call

When terminating a conference call, both calls are ended. If the call is terminated by one of the other parties, the other conversation may be continued.

Phone book

The phone book accesses the contacts* and shows all contacts for which a phone number has been stored. The entries can be selected to make a call.

1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"

All contacts with a phone number are displayed. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts.

Phone book A-Z search Angi BMW Service Christoph Dr. Tom Mustermann Office

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address

has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone

Calling a contact

1. Select the desired contact.

A connection is established immediately if calling contacts with one phone number.

For contacts with several phone numbers:

1. Select the desired phone number.

The connection is established.

Symbol Meaning

	Contact with one phone number.
	Contact with more than one phone number.
	Call not possible. Mobile phone has no reception or network or does not have Teleservice Call* activated.

Editing a contact

The entries in the contacts can be changed. When a contact from the mobile phone is changed, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle.

1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"

The contact can be edited.

Redialing

The eight phone numbers dialed last are stored.

Dialing the number via iDrive

1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"

Telephone Active calls Phone book ✓ Redial Received calls Dial number Messages Bluetooth (telephone)

1. Select the desired entry. The connection is established.

Deleting entries individually or deleting all entries

1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts

1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other".

5. Complete the entries if necessary.

6. "Store contact in vehicle"

Received calls

The 20 calls that were last received are displayed.

1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"

Telephone Active calls Phone book Redial ✓ Received calls Dial number Messages Bluetooth (telephone)

Calling a number from the list

Select an entry.

The connection is established.

Deleting entries individually or deleting all entries

1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Saving an entry in the contacts

1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact"

Messages

Various types of messages can be displayed:

Messages from My info
Messages from the BMW Concierge service

Displaying messages

1. "Telephone"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.

My Info

To start destination guidance:

1. Select the message that contains the desired destination.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

To dial the number in the message:

1. Select the message that contains the desired number.

2. "Call"

Messages from the concierge service

To use the address in destination guidance*:

1. Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".

Concierge 442km Start guidance Deutschland 80788 München Petueiring 130 08912345678

1. Start destination guidance, if necessary.

To dial a phone number:

1. Select the message.
2. "Call"

To save an address:

1. Select the message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Deleting messages

1. Select the message to be deleted.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages"

Switching between mobile phone and hands-free system

From mobile phone to hands-free system\*

You can continue ongoing calls outside of the vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free system as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically switches to hands-free mode.

With mobile phones that do not automatically switch to hands-free mode:

Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, it may be possible to continue the conversation via the hands-free system. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.

From hands-free system to mobile phone

If you are making a call via the hands-free system, it may be possible to continue the call via the mobile phone, depending on your mobile phone model. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.

Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth link, refer to page 172.

Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, it may occur that calls are switched from the hands-free system to the mobile phone if reception of the wireless network is poor.

Operation by voice commands\*

The concept

You can operate your mobile phone without having to take a hand off the steering wheel.

...< Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

Requirements

The same prerequisites apply as for operation via iDrive, refer to page 173.

Saying commands

Activating voice activation system

1. Briefly press the button on the steering wheel. A sound signal indicates that you can say commands.

2. Say the command.

Ending/canceling operation by voice commands

Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or

Cancel<.

In dialogs not involving voice commands, i.e. when you are speaking only text, e.g. a name, canceling is possible only via the button on the steering wheel.

Having the possible commands read aloud

The system recognizes specific commands that must be pronounced exactly word for word. You can have the possible commands for any function read aloud to you:

Help<.

Digits from zero to nine are recognized.

You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

Using alternative commands

Often there is more than a single command to run a function, e.g.:

Dial name< or >Name<.

Example: dialing phone numbers

To start the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

You say Voice control response

>Dial number<	>>Please say the number<<
e.g. >123 456 7890<	Depending on your equipment version: >>123 456 7890. Continue ?<<

Dial< The system dials the displayed phone number.

Adjusting the volume of the instructions

You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the button during an instruction.

This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

1. Dial number<.

2. Say the phone number. For telephone calls abroad, say 'Plus' and then the country code.

3. Dial<.

The connection to the desired subscriber is established.

Correcting phone numbers

After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.

Correct number<.

The digits are deleted.

You have the option of repeating the command >Correct number< until all of the digits have been deleted.

Deleting phone numbers

'Delete'.

All digits entered up to this point are deleted.

Redialing

To redial the phone number dialed last:

Redial<.

Voice-activated phone book\*

Depending on the vehicle 's equipment, it can be necessary to establish a separate voice-activate phone book.

For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice activation system and no abbreviations.

The entries must be entered using voice commands and are separate from the memory in the mobile phone. In this case, phone numbers stored on the mobile phone cannot be called up or saved there using voice commands. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An entry always consists of a name and a phone number.

Creating and editing a voice phone book

To store an entry:

An entry always consists of a name and a phone number.

1. Save name<.

2. Say the name. Saying the name for the voice phone book should not take longer than approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being prompted to do so by the system.
4. To save the phone number: 'Save'.

To delete an entry:

You can delete any entry from the voice phone book.

1. Delete name#. The dialog for deleting an entry opens.

2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with >Yes<.

To delete all entries:

The command >Delete phonebook< deletes all entries in the phone book.

1. Delete phonebook. The dialog for deleting the phone book opens.
2. Confirm the query with >Yes<.
3. Once again confirm the query with 'Yes'.

To listen to and select the entries:

You can have all entries in your voice phone book read aloud in the order in which they were entered and select a specific entry to establish a connection:

1. Read phonebook. The dialog for reading the phone book opens.
2. Say 'Dial number' when the desired entry is read.

Selecting an entry

The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.

1. Dial name<.
   The dialog for selecting an entry is opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with >Yes().

Notes

Notes on Emergency Requests

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection. Use the SOS button* instead, refer to page 219.

Important for voice commands

For voice commands, bear in mind the following:

Say the commands, numbers and letters smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis and speed.
Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.
Keep the doors, windows, glass sunroof* or convertible top* closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.
Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Inserting/removing the snap-in adapter\*

1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.

Diagram of a mechanical or fluidic component with directional arrows and a labeled dimension '1' (no text or symbols beyond basic labels)

1. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and press it downward until it engages.

3D illustration of a black box with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

To remove the snap-in adapter: Press button 1.

3D diagram of a vehicle or container with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Inserting mobile phone

1. If applicable, remove the protective cap from the mobile phone's antenna connector so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.
2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the mobile phone up towards the electrical contact points and press it downward until it engages.

Top-down view of a mobile phone with a screen and keypad, showing no visible text or symbols.

The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steering is unlocked.

To conserve vehicle battery power, you should avoid using the mobile phone

when the ignition is switched off.

Removing mobile phone

Close-up of a remote control panel with a black arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button.

Contacts\*

You can create and edit contacts. The contacts from the mobile phone* are displayed as well if this function is supported by the mobile phone. The addresses can be used as destinations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

New contact

1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"

Contacts ✓ New contact My contacts

1. If the entry fields are still filled with the previous entries, select "Delete input fields".
2. To fill in the entry fields: Select the symbol next to the entry field.

New contact Delete input fields Store contact in vehicle Last name First name Home Business Mobile

1. Enter the text.

If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, it is only possible to enter addresses that are contained in the navigation data in the vehicle. This ensures that destination guidance is possible for all addresses.

1. StoreIf you wish, say
2. "Store contact in vehicle"

Specifying a contact as the home address

A contact can be stored as a home address. It is placed at the top of "My contacts".

1. "Home"
2. Create the contact.

My contacts

A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the mobile phone*.

Displaying contacts

1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"

Contacts New contact ✓ My contacts

All contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z search is offered. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:

Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle; the address has not been checked as a destination.

In the vehicle; the address has been checked as a destination.

Mobile phone*

Displaying the detailed view\*

Select the desired contact.

All fields that have been filled in for that contact are displayed.

Selecting name display

Names can be displayed in different sequences.

1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first, last name"

Depending on how the contacts were stored in your mobile phone, the name display can differ from the selected display.

Selecting a contact as the navigation destination

1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired address.

Contacts from the mobile phone* may contain addresses that do not match the navigation data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot be used for destination guidance. In this case: Manually correct the address.

Checking the address as a destination\*

An address that is to be used for destination guidance must match the navigation data contained in the vehicle. An address that is stored on the mobile phone can be matched to the navigation data.

1. Select the desired contact and highlight the address.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Check as destination"

4. Correct and store the address, if necessary. If the address is corrected and stored, then a copy is established in the vehicle. The address is not changed on the mobile phone.

Dialing a phone number\*

1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired phone number.
   The connection is established.

Editing a contact

1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. "Edit contact"

Contact Edit contact MUSTERMANN MÜNCHEN, MÜNCHEN (STA PETUELRING 130 DEUTSCHLAND

1. Change the entries.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Yes"

If a contact from the mobile phone* is edited, the changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and only this copy is displayed. When certain prerequisites are met, a specifically identical contact entry is established.

Deleting contacts

Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone* cannot be deleted.

1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

BMW Assist\*

BMW Assist\*

BMW Assist provides a number of different services. For example, the position data of the vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center when an Emergency Request* is sent.

Many BMW Assist services depend on the contract individually agreed upon.

After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will be available. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.

Requirements

The installed BMW Assist system is logged in to a wireless communications network. This network must be capable of transmitting the services.
To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine its current position.
To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available.
The BMW Assist service contract was signed with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. The service must have been fully enabled.
BMW Assist is activated.

Services offered

Emergency Request: when you press the SOS button, a connection to the BMW Assist Response Center is established. The BMW Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.
▶ Automatic Collision Notification: under certain conditions, a connection to the BMW Assist Response Center is established after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW

Assist Response Center then speaks with you and takes further steps to help you.

Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if assistance is needed in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and position data are transmitted during this call.
▶ Customer Relations: connection to Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.
TeleService: data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmitted to your BMW center, either automatically before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.
Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist Response Center provides assistance if, for example, the remote control is not available and the vehicle needs to be opened.
Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to the police that your vehicle was stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can determine its position.
In addition, the optional Convenience Plan offers a concierge service and information on route planning, the traffic situation and weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited number of calls can be made via the BMW Assist Response Center, for example if the mobile phone is not available or discharged. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center.

TeleService\*

TeleService supports communication with your BMW center.

Data on the vehicle's service requirements can be sent directly to the BMW center. In this way, the BMW center can plan its work in advance. This shortens the duration of the service appointment.
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehicle's condition can be sent directly to Roadside Assistance*.
The service varies by country.
▶ Connection may incur charges.
Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements

BMW Assist is activated.
▶ Wireless reception is available.
The engine is running.

Concierge service\*

When you call the BMW Assist Concierge service, you can obtain information about, for example, restaurants, emergency pharmacy services, gas stations or hotels, as well as receive the corresponding telephone numbers and addresses.

You can then dial a phone number directly or use an address for destination guidance *.

Starting the concierge service

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"

BMW Assist ✓ Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance BMW Search Customer Relations Service Request Service status

1. "Start service"

A voice connection is established to the BMW Concierge service.

You are connected to an employee of the BMW Concierge service to obtain the required information. You can then have the phone number and address sent to you and, for example, use it for destination guidance in the navigation system. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service. When an information message is received, a list of the received messages is displayed automatically. Open the message via the message list, refer to page 177.

Roadside Assistance

You can call BMW Roadside Assistance * should you require help in the event of a break-down.

Starting Roadside Assistance

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"

The BMW Roadside Assistance number is displayed. If a mobile phone* is paired, a connection is established to BMW Road-side Assistance.

BMW Assist Concierge Messages ✓ Roadside Assistance BMW Search Customer Relations Service Request Service status

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"

3. "Start service"

Rouchide Assistance Start service Service ready

TeleService Diagnosis\*

TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that are important for vehicle diagnosis. TeleService Diagnosis can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and termination of the voice connection.

TeleService Help\*

TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wireless transmission. TeleService Help can be started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance and termination of the voice connection.

Starting TeleService Help

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"

After completion of TeleService Help, a voice connection is established to Roadside Assistance.

Activating BMW Assist\*

If the services included in a valid BMW Assist subscription are not displayed, they may need to be activated.

1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its current position. Reception is usually best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

2. Switch on the ignition.

3. "Activate BMW Assist"

Activation may take several minutes. If another menu is opened, activation continues running in the background.

BMW Search\*

BMW Search is an online portal that makes certain services available for use in your vehicle, e.g. information on restaurants along your route.

License conditions:

This product contains NetFront Browser software of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront is a trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd., in Japan and other countries.

This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

Requirements

Subscription to the optional Convenience Plan.
The vehicle is located within wireless network coverage.
The date setting on the Control Display is current.

Starting BMW Search

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"

BMW Assist Concierge Messages Roadside Assistance ✓ BMW Search Customer Relations Service Request Service status

1. Select "OK", if you wish.
   The BMW Search start page is displayed.

Using BMW Search

To select and display content:

Turn the controller to highlight an element.
▶ Press the controller to display an element.

Opening the start page

1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"

Options Split screen Switch off control display Current page Display start page Reload Cancel loading BMW Search

Loading a new page

1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"

Canceling

1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"

Customer Relations

At a glance

Contact Customer Relations for information on all aspects of your vehicle.

Calling Customer Relations

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"

A voice connection is established to Customer Relations.

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist or BMW TeleService

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"

The Customer Relations phone number is displayed. If the vehicle is equipped with the mobile phone preparation package, a voice connection is established.

Customer Relations Please call this number: 08912345678

Service Request\*

At a glance

You can send a request to your BMW center to arrange a service appointment. The TeleService data is transmitted during a Service Request. If possible, your BMW center will establish contact with you.

Starting a Service Request

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"

Service Request Start service Service ready

Automatic Service Request\*

The TeleService data necessary for servicing the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW center prior to the service deadline. If possible, the center will contact you and a service appointment can be arranged.

You can check when the BMW center was notified.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Vehicle Info Onboard info Trip computer ✓ Vehicle status

1. Open "Options".
2. "Last Service Request"

Data transfer\*

The status of the data transfer is displayed.

1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"

Service status\*

Displaying available services

Display of all services available in the vehicle.

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service status"
3. "Available services"

Activating BMW Assist

If the services included in a BMW Assist subscription are not displayed, they may need to be activated.

Close-up of a glass pipette dispensing liquid into a circular container (no visible text or symbols)

Mobility

This section helps you maintain your car's mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants, wheels and tires, service, maintenance and roadside assistance.

Refueling

Always switch off the engine before refueling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to ink and a message will be displayed.

Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when ing fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con- s in your vehicle. They can develop a leak cause an explosion or cause a fire in the of an accident.

Fuel filler flap

Opening

Diagram showing a car's side panel with an inset view of the dashboard and a close-up of the dashboard (no text or symbols present)

1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly press the rear edge.
2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Closing

Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

Do not pinch the band attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed by and fuel vapors can escape. A mes-will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or wing.

Manually releasing the fuel filler flap

In the event of a malfunction, you can release the fuel filler flap manually:

1. Remove the cover from the right-hand sidewall of the cargo area.

Diagram showing a door handle with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating movement or positioning

1. Pull the button with the fuel pump symbol down.

The fuel filler flap is released.

Observe the following when refueling

When handling fuels, follow the safety instructions provided at filling stations; wise, there is a risk of personal injury orerty damage.

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to

premature pump shutoff
reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recovery system.

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity

Approx. 14 US gallons/53 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.

Fuel specifications

Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this would cause permanent damage to theitic converter.

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing 85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system will be damaged.

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91

This gasoline is highly recommended.

However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:

128i: 87

135i:89

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

Do not use any gasoline below the specified minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the e could be damaged.

Use high-quality brands

Field experience has indicated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of cosolvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in drivability, starting and stalling problems

especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude.

Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier

Detergent Gasoline.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.

BMW recommends BP fuels

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressures

Information for your safety

It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response.

Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.

Checking pressure

Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 85, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 83.

Inflation pressure specifications

The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.

For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressures, observe the following:

▶ Tire sizes for your vehicle
Load conditions
▶ Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h

For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.

These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's side door post when the driver's door is open.

Interior view of a car showing the door, seatbelt, and window (no text or symbols visible)

The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or

160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the columns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur.

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could occur.

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 128i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

	Traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph/160 km/h		Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S 32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 205/50 R 17 89 H M+S	32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V	32/220	-	36/250	-
Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V	-	35/240	-	44/300
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y	32/220	-	35/240	-
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y	-	39/270	-	42/290

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 135i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

	Traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph/160 km/h		Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 33/230 36/250 38/260 42/290
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y	36/250	-	38/260	-
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y	-	39/270	-	42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 128i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

	Traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph/160 km/h		Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
without Sport Package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S	32/220	35/240	32/220	39/270
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S	32/220	38/260	35/240	42/290
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 35/240 - Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V	-	36/250	-	41/280
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 35/240 - 35/240 - Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y	-	41/280	-	41/280
with Sport Package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S	32/220	35/240	32/220	39/270
205/50 R 17 89 H M+S	32/220	38/260	35/240	42/29O
Front: 205/50 R 17 89 V 32/220 - 39/270 - Rear: 225/45 R 17 91 V	-	36/250	-	46/320
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y 35/240 - 38/260 - Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y	-	41/280	-	45/310
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 135i

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

	Traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph/160 km/h	Traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

without Sport Package

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 36/250 42/290
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y	39/270	-	39/270	-
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y	-	41/280	-	41/280

with Sport Package

205/50 R 17 89 H M+S 32/220 38/260 36/250 42/290
Front: 215/40 R 18 85 Y	39/270	-	39/270	-
Rear: 245/35 R 18 88 Y	-	41/280	-	45/310

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 229.

Tire identification marks

Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

e.g. 225/45 R 17 9 1 V Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in % Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating, not on ZR tires Speed code letter, in front of the R on ZR tires

Speed code letter

Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

e.g. DOT xxxx xxx 1010 Manufacturer's code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

Tire age

The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 1010 means that the tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2010.

BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Tread wear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

RSC - run-flat tires

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 200.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires.

These have better winter properties than summer tires.

XL

Designation for specially reinforced tires.

Tire condition

Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth

The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of

1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface. When winter tires wear down past a tread depth of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.

Close-up of a car tire with visible tread pattern and side profile inset (no text or symbols)

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.

Wheel/tire damage

Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more susceptible to road hazard and consequential damages.

Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.

In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thor-

oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there.

Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard to vehicle occupants and other road users.

Run-flat tires

Close-up of a tire with a circular logo labeled 'RSC' and a registered trademark symbol (no readable text or symbols beyond the logo)

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall.

Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforcement in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restrictions, even if depressurized.

For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 83.

New wheels and tires

Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.

Retreaded tires

BMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires, since driving safety may be impaired. The causes for this include potentially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.

Correct wheels and tires

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufacturing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions, which could lead to body contact and thus to severe accidents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety.

You can inquire about the right wheel/tire combination at your BMW center.

The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or FTM.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been damaged, mount the previous wheel and tire combination again as soon as possible.

Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a puncture, refer to page 85. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

Recommended tire brands

Close-up of a tire with a star and arrow pointing to it, alongside a star symbol (no text or labels)

Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire.

When properly used, these tires meet the highest standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.

Special characteristics of winter tires

BMW recommends winter tires for winter roads or at temperatures below +45°F/+7°C.

Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Pay attention to speed

Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure to do so could result in tire damage and accidents.

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center can supply these labels.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire.

Swapping wheels between axles

BMW advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles, even if all tires have the same size, as this could impair driving characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes, swapping wheels between the axles is not permissible.

Snow chains\*

Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your BMW center for more information. Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only. Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with chains.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the ument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to page 81.

Under the hood

Do not work on the car unless you possess the necessary technical knowledge. If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guidelines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a BMW center or by a workshop that work according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Hood

Releasing

Abstract grayscale image with blurred background and a small arrow icon in the bottom-left corner (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever.

Opening

Front view of a car with grille grilles and a logo, alongside an inset showing a person climbing stairs (no text or symbols)

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield before you open the engine compartment. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down; otherwise, injuries may result. Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Front view of a car with a hood and arrow indicators (no text or symbols)

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely.

Important parts of the engine compartment

Diagram of a car interior with numbered parts labeled 1 to 4, showing mechanical components and dashboard.

1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 205
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp cleaning system and window washer system, refer to page 66

Engine oil

The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.

Checking oil level

Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.

For precise measurement and display of the oil level, the engine must be at operating temperature, i.e. following at least 6.2 miles/10 km of uninterrupted driving. You can have the oil level displayed while you are driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running.

3 Jump-starting connection, refer to page 220
4 Fluid filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil, page 205

Display in the instrument cluster

1 2 1 1 OIL

1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol is shown in the display, accompanied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2. The oil level is checked and the reading displayed.

Possible displays

OK 1 sin max 2 +11 3 > MAX 4 INACTIVE 5

1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked.

This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.

3 Oil level down to minimum:

Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil on page 205.

4 Oil level is too high.

Too much oil will harm the engine.

Have the vehicle checked without

delay.

5 The oil level sensor is defective.

Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated distance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 207. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display via iDrive

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Vehicle Info Onboard info ✓ Trip computer Vehicle status

1. "Engine oil level"

Vehicle status Engine oil level

Possible messages

"Engine oil level OK"
"Measurement not possible at this time."
"Measuring engine oil level...":

This can take about 1 minute if the car is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running, and about 5 minutes while the car is moving.

If engine oil was added, it may take up to 30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.

"Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1 quart!"

Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil below.

If the oil level is below the minimum value, add engine oil immediately to avoid engine damage.

"Engine oil level too high! Have this checked."*:

Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, the excess oil may lead to engine damage.

"Measurement inactive. Have this checked."

Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to drive, note the recalculated remaining mileage until the next oil change service, refer to Service requirements on page 72. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Adding engine oil

Close-up of a car engine compartment with a small sensor device and directional arrow symbol (no text or labels)

Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a corresponding message is shown on the Control Display. Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the relevant warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.

Oil change

Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Oil grades

Do not use any oil additives; otherwise, you may cause engine damage.

Approved engine oils

You BMW center will be happy to advise you about the engine oils approved by the manufacturer of your vehicle.

The engine oil grade is a decisive factor for the service life of the engine.

Approved engine oils can be found in the following specification:

Gasoline engine

Preferred: BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Alternative: BMW Longlife-98

Approved engine oils belong to the viscosity classes SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30.

Alternative oil grades

If approved oils are not available, you can use quantities of up to 1 US quart/1 liter of another oil with the following specifications:

API SM or higher

BMW recommends

Castrol

Coolant

Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause burns.

Coolant consists of half water and half additive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for suitable additives.

Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may result. Because additives are harmful to your health, it is important to follow the instructions on the containers.

Comply with the appropriate environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant additives.

Checking coolant level

1. Do not open the engine hood before the engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to the filler neck.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a magnified inset showing a cylindrical feature (no text or symbols visible)

1. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
2. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
3. Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

Maintenance

BMW Maintenance System

Vehicle status Service required

The BMW Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle maintenance costs.

If and when you come to sell your BMW, a comprehensive record of servicing will prove a significant benefit.

Condition Based Service CBS

Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected maintenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, refer to page 72:

Engine oil
▶ Brake pads: separately for front and rear
Brake fluid
▶ Vehicle check
Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations

Service data in the remote control

Your vehicle continuously stores service-requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advisor can read out this data from the remote control unit, and propose an optimized maintenance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used.

Make sure that the date is always set correctly, refer to page 75; otherwise, the effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.

BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your BMW center.

Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis OBD

Abstract grayscale image with blurred background and a small arrow pointing left (no text or symbols)

On the driver's side is an OBD socket for checking components relevant to the composition of the vehicle's emissions.

Emissions

The warning lamp lights up:

The vehicle is producing higher emissions. The trip can be continued. Have

the car checked as soon as possible.

Canadian models display this warning lamp.

The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If this happens, you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions-related components, especially the catalytic converter.

The warning lamp comes on if the gas cap is not properly tightened and the OBD system assumes that fuel vapor

is escaping. Make sure that the gas cap is correctly positioned and close it until it audibly clicks.

Data memory

Your vehicle records data about the operation, faults, and user settings. These data are stored in the vehicle and in extract form, in the remote control, and can be read out using suitable devices at your BMW center. The data that are read out are used to support service procedures and repairs or to optimize and expand vehicle functions. If you have a BMW Assist contract, certain vehicle data can also be transmitted directly from the vehicle in order to enable the desired services.

Care

Care products

Regular cleaning and care contributes significantly to the value retention of your BMW.

BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your vehicle with products that are approved by BMW for this purpose.

Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on the products and services available for cleaning and caring for your BMW.

Original BMW CareProducts have been material tested, laboratory checked and in the field, and offer optimal care and action for your vehicle.

Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents as these may result in dam-

Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous or hazardous to your

health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety instructions on the packaging. When cleaning inside the vehicle, always open the doors or windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, provide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products designed for cleaning vehicles.

Exterior care

Washing the vehicle

Especially during the winter months, ensure that the vehicle is washed more

frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead to vehicle damage.

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,

water can reduce braking efficiency over the short term and brake discs can corrode.

Automatic car washes

Preference should be given to cloth car washes.

Do not use high-pressure car washes; otherwise, water may drip into the vehicle and the windows.

Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is suitable for your BMW. Check the following:

Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to page 227.
If necessary, fold in the outside rearview mirrors, refer to page 50.
▶ Maximum permissible tire width.

Avoid car washes with guide rail heights over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is the er of damaging chassis parts.

In Convertibles, do not treat the convertible top with wax. Ensure that a program is available that does not apply wax or is designed specifically for convertibles.

Preparations before driving into an automatic car wash:

▷ Unscrew the rod antenna*.
Deactivate the rain sensor* to prevent unintentional wiping.
Remove additional attachments, e.g. spoilers or telephone antennas, if there is a possibility that they could be damaged.

Automatic transmission

Before driving into an automatic car wash, perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

Sports automatic transmission with double clutch

Before driving into an automatic car wash, perform the following steps to ensure that the vehicle can roll:

1. Insert the remote control into the ignition lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock so that the vehicle can roll.

The transmission is switched into position P:

▶ automatically after approx. 30 minutes

▶ if you remove the infrared remote control from the ignition lock

Steam jets/high-pressure washers

When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle and do not exceed a temperature of 140^ F/60°C.

Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or temperature can lead to component damage or water penetration. Follow the operating instructions for the steam jet or high-pressure washer.

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray against the sensors and cameras, e.g. of the Park Distance Control or Rear View Camera, for an extended period and maintain a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.

Manual car wash

When washing the vehicle by hand, use large quantities of water and car shampoo if necessary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or washing brush, applying light pressure only.

Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the rain sensor or switch off the ignition to prevent unintentional activation of the wipers.

Observe local regulations pertaining to washing vehicles by hand.

Headlamps

Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents.

Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or insect remover and wash away with copious quantities of water.

Thaw ice with a windshield deicer and do not use an ice scraper.

Windows

Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.

Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners containing quartz.

Convertible top care

The appearance and life of the convertible top depend on proper care and operation.

Follow these instructions:

Do not fold the convertible top into the convertible top box when the top is wet or frozen, as this may cause water spots, mold stains or chafed areas.
If water spots occur on the inside headliner despite precautions, remove them using a microfiber cloth and interior cleaner.
If the vehicle is parked in enclosed areas for extended periods, ensure that there is sufficient ventilation.
Remove bird droppings immediately, as their corrosive ingredients attack the convertible top and damage the rubber seals.

To remove stains from the convertible top, do not use stain removers, paint thinners, solvents, benzine or similar substances.

These substances may damage the rubber parts. Improper care and cleaning may cause the convertible top and convertible top seams to become leaky.

To remove heavy soiling, use a special convertible top cleaner.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions for use.

After washing the convertible top three to five times, treat it with an impregnating agent.

Paintwork care

Regular care contributes to value retention and protects the paintwork against the long-term effects of damaging substances.

Region-specific environmental influences can damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is important to adapt the frequency and scope of car care accordingly.

Immediately remove aggressive materials such as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or bird droppings to prevent damage to the paint-work.

Repairing paintwork damage

Immediately repair scratches or similar damage, such as that caused by stones

hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent rusting.

BMW recommends having paintwork damage repaired by a professional paint repair workshop according to BMW specifications using original BMW paint materials.

Preservation

A preservation treatment is necessary when water no longer beads off the clean paintwork surface. Only use products for paintwork preservation that contain carnauba or synthetic waxes.

Rubber seals

Treat only with water or rubber care products.

Do not use silicon-containing care products on rubber seals; otherwise, noise image could occur.

Chrome parts

Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radiator grill, door handles or window frames with copious quantities of water and a shampoo additive, especially when roads are treated with de-icing salt. For additional treatment, use a chrome polish.

Light-alloy wheels

For technical reasons, dust is generated during braking that is deposited on the light-alloy wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid-free rim cleaner.

Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or in jets over 1407/606; otherwise, damage occur.

Outside sensors/cameras

Keep the sensors and cameras on the outside of the vehicle, e.g. those for Park

Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure that they remain fully functional.

Interior care

Upholstery fabrics/cloth trims/Alcantara fabrics

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to remove superficial dirt.

To remove severe spots such as stains from beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the packaging.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong ng.

Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are d.

Leather/leather trim

The leather used by BMW is a high quality natural product. Slight irregularities in the er are a typical characteristic of natural er.

Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the leather have an abrasive effect, leading to increased wear and causing the leather surface to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, frequently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently as dust and dirt are more noticeable.

Treat the leather at least once every two months using a leather lotion as dirt and grease will gradually attack the leather's protective layer.

Carpet/floor mats\*

The floor mats can be removed for cleaning. When heavily soiled, clean carpets with a microfiber cloth and water or textile cleaner. Rub back and forth in the direction of travel; otherwise, the carpet may become matted.

Interior plastic parts

▶ Imitation leather surfaces
Lamp glasses
▶ Display pane of instrument cluster
Matte parts

Clean with water and solvent-free plastic cleaner if necessary.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.

Safety belts

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

Do not clean chemically, as this may destroy the webbing.

Interior sensors/cameras

To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g. of the high-beam assistant, use a lint-free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.

Displays

To clean displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument cluster, use a cleaning cloth for displays or a soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.

Avoid applying excessive pressure when cleaning the displays; otherwise, damage

may occur.

Do not use chemical or abrasive household cleaning agents. Keep all types of fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces or electrical components may be corroded or damaged.

CD/DVD drives

Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may damage parts of the drive.

Vehicle storage

If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for longer than three months, your BMW center or a workshop that operates according to BMW specifications will be glad to advise you.

Replacing components

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored below the floor mat in the cargo area.

Wiper blades

Diagram showing a cable or cable connector with directional arrows and a magnified inset (no text or symbols)

1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1, and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mechanism, pulling the blade toward the front.

To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield

before you open the engine compartment.

Lamps and bulbs

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recommends having your BMW center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your BMW center.

Only change bulbs when cool; otherwise, you may burn yourself.

When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the con-er in question; otherwise, short-circuits result. To avoid possible injury or equip-damage when replacing bulbs, observe instructions provided by the bulb manufac-

If the routine for changing a particular bulb is not described here, please contact

your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Light-emitting diodes LED

Light-emitting diodes installed behind translucent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source

for several hours; otherwise, this could cause irritation of the retina.

Headlight lenses

In cool or humid weather, condensation may form on the interior of outside lamps. When the light is switched on, the condensation will disappear after a short time. The headlight lenses do not need to be replaced.

At high humidities, e.g. water droplets may form in the lights; have these checked by your BMW center.

Xenon lamps\*

These bulbs have a very long service life and are highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails nevertheless, switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care, provided that local legislation does not prohibit this.

Have any work on the xenon lamp system, including bulb replacements, performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if such work is carried out improperly, the high voltage in the system presents the danger of fatal injuries.

Removing the headlamp cover

1. Pull the wire brackets over the notches, see arrows, and fold to the side.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a magnified inset showing internal features (no visible text or symbols)

1. Fold away the headlamp cover.

Be careful when attaching the headlamp cover and ensure that both wire brackets are securely in place; otherwise, leaks could occur and cause damage to the headlamp system.

Attach the headlamp cover in reverse order.

Halogen headlamps

Halogen low beams and high beams

H7 bulb, 55 watts

Always wear gloves and eye protection; the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is pressurized. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury if the bulb is damaged.

Diagram showing two labeled mechanical components with directional arrows indicating motion or flow, numbered 1 and 2.

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1 High beams
2 Low-beam headlamps
1. Remove the headlamp cover.
2. Fold down the holding bracket.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
4. Reattach the bulb holder with the notch at the top.
5. Fold the holding bracket back up and let it snap into place.
6. Attach the headlamp cover.

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps

W5W bulb, 5 watts

1. Remove the headlamp cover.

Abstract grayscale illustration of a mechanical or architectural component with circular features and a white arrow pointing to a detail (no text or symbols)

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1. Pull out the bulb holder.
2. Remove and replace the bulb.
3. Reinsert the bulb holder.
4. Attach the headlamp cover.

Xenon headlamps

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, daytime running lights

H8 bulb, 35 watts

Top-down view of a vehicle battery pack with internal components and a hand holding a plug (no visible text or symbols)

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1. Remove the headlamp cover.
2. Turn the bulb, see arrow, and remove it.
3. Pull off the connector and replace the bulb.
4. Attach the connector, insert the bulb and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.
5. Attach the headlamp cover.

Corner-illuminating lamps

H3 bulb, 55 watts

The figure shows the right-hand headlamp.

1. Remove the top headlamp cover, using the screwdriver to push the detents to one side.

Close-up of a car interior with a black arrow pointing to a small object on the floor (no visible text or symbols)

1. Turn the bulb holder, see arrow, and remove it.

Aerial view of a vehicle being lowered into a car, with no visible text or symbols.

1. Slide the bulb out of the holder and pull off the connector.
2. Replace the bulb and attach the connector.
3. Insert the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.
4. Attach the headlamp cover.

Turn signals, front

PY21W bulb, 21 watts

The turn signal bulb can be changed via a cover in the wheel arch.

Diagram of a car wheel with two directional arrows and a magnified inset showing a numbered component (no text or symbols present)

1. Turn the respective wheel inwards.
2. Using a coin, turn both locks of the cover all the way to the left, arrows 1, and remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove it, arrow 2.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the right for removal and replacement.
5. Insert the bulb holder and lock it by turning it to the right.
6. Attach the cover by positioning the bottom edge first and then turning both locks all the way to the right.

Side turn signals

W5W bulb, 5 watts

1. Press the rear edge of the lamp toward the front with your fingertip, arrow 1 and pivot it out, arrow 2.

1 2

1. While simultaneously lifting the retaining tab, rotate bulb holder to the left and remove.
2. Remove lamp and replace it.

To install, insert front end of the lamp and press into place at the back.

Tail lamps

Turn signal: PY21W bulb, 21 watts
Backup lamp: W16W bulb, 16 watts
Brake lamps: P21W bulb, 21 watts
Brake Force Display lamp: H21W bulb, 21 watts

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 Inner brake lamp
2 Outer brake lamp
3 Lateral reflector
4 Roadside parking lamp and tail lamp LED
5 Reflector

6 Turn signal
7 Backup lamp
8 Brake Force Display lamp

Replacing tail lamps

Outer brake lamp

Interior view of a vehicle showing a tool interacting with a car interior, with an inset close-up of the tool (no visible text or symbols)

The outer brake lamp can be accessed through a single socket.

The figure shows the right side of the vehicle.

1. Remove the cover from the panel of the cargo area.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left, see arrow, and remove it.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Attach the bulb holder and turn it all the way in the opposite direction.
5. Reattach the cover.

The roadside parking lamp/tail lamp uses LED design. After replacing the bulb, ensure that the bulb holder is properly seated; otherwise, the roadside parking lamp/tail lamp may not work.

Inner brake lamp, turn signal, backup lamp and Brake Force Display lamp

Close-up of a mechanical component with internal parts and arrows indicating features (no visible text or symbols)

The bulbs are integrated in a single bulb holder.

1. Remove the cover from the panel of the cargo area.
2. Detach the bulb holder by pressing together the clips, see arrows, and remove it.
3. Brake lamps and turn signal: apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Backup lamp: pull the bulb out of the socket and replace it.
5. Attach the bulb holder and let it snap into place.
6. Reattach the cover.

License plate lamps and center brake lamp

These lamps use LED technology for operation. In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Changing wheels

Your BMW comes with run-flat tires as standard equipment. This eliminates the need to change a wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.

For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 83.

The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to Run-flat tires, page 200.

When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer also to New wheels and tires, page 200.

The tools for changing wheels are available as optional accessories from your

BMW center.

Jack mounting points

Side view of a car with two arrows pointing to the front side (no text or symbols present)

The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.

Vehicle battery

Battery care

The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.

Replacing the battery

Use only vehicle battery types that are approved by the manufacturer of your

vehicle; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged or some functions may become partly or completely unavailable.

After replacing the battery, have it paired with the vehicle at your BMW center so that all convenience functions are completely available.

Charging the battery

Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off. Connections, refer to Jump-starting on page 220.

Disposal

Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or bring them to a recycling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport.

Power failure

After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be programmed:

Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to page 74.
Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, refer to page 143.
▶ Navigation system
Wait for the system to start, refer to page 137.
Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be raised. The system must be initialized. Please contact your BMW center.
Seat and mirror memory*
The positions must be stored again, refer to page 48.
Inside rearview mirror with digital compass The system must be calibrated, refer to page 104.
Active steering
The system automatically initializes itself briefly during a trip. The system is deactivated during this time, refer to page 87.

Fuses

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating; otherwise, this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.

In the glove compartment

Diagram showing a mechanical component with numbered parts and directional arrows indicating motion or assembly.

Accessing the fuse box:

1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Remove the damper, arrow 1, from the lower holder by applying forward pressure.
3. Disengage the glove compartment by pressing on both tabs, arrows 2, and fold it down.

Plastic tweezers are located on the distributor box.

Information on fuse assignment can be found next to the distributor box.

Spare fuses are available from your BMW center.

After replacing a fuse, press the glove compartment upward until it engages and reattach the damper.

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency Request\*

Conditions for an Emergency Request:

Full preparation package mobile phone: this equipment makes it possible to send an Emergency Request even if no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.
BMW Assist is activated. Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 186.
Radio readiness is on.
The BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network.
The Emergency Request system is operable.

Once your service contract for BMW Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be deactivated by a BMW center without you having to visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, Emergency Requests are not possible. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.

Sending an Emergency Request

1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.

Interior view of a car showing a door panel and a close-up of the door handle (no text or symbols visible)

1. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.

As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established, the LED flashes.

Once the BMW Assist Response Center has received your Emergency Request, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you

and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center will be able to initiate further steps to assist you under certain conditions.

If the circumstances allow this, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.

Data for determining the necessary rescue measures are transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. the current position of your vehicle, if it can be determined.

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may still be heard by the BMW Assist Response Center, however.

Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is sent automatically immediately after a severe accident. This Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by the button being pressed.

For technical reasons, the Emergency Request service cannot be guaranteed

for the most unfavorable conditions.

Roadside Assistance

BMW Roadside Assistance is available by phone around the clock in many countries. You can obtain support there in the event of a breakdown.

Phone numbers for BMW Roadside Assistance can be found in the Contact brochure.

First aid pouch\*

Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any items in good time, if necessary.

Black first aid kit placed inside a vehicle door (no visible text or symbols)

The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the cargo area in a storage area.

Warning triangle\*

Diagram of a car rear bumper with two black buttons and arrows pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols)

The warning triangle is located in a holder in the trunk lid. Press the tabs to take it out.

Jump-starting

If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal accident may occur. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.

Preparation

1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise, there is a danger of shorting.

Connecting jumper cables

Connect the jumper cables in the correct order to prevent sparking at the battery, which could cause injury.

Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the battery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 203. The cap is marked with +.

1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting connection up to remove.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a tool interacting with a component, with an inset close-up of a component (no text or symbols visible)

1. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

2. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

3. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/- jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle.

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a detail (no visible text or symbols)

1. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/– jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.

If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

Tow-starting, towing away

Observe the applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing vehi-

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being d.

Using a tow fitting

The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

It is stored with the onboard vehicle tool kit underneath the floor mat in the cargo area, refer to page 213.

Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoiding loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.

Access to screw thread

Rectangular cover panel in bumper:

Press the arrow on the cover.

Front

Diagram of a car's side profile showing dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

Rear

Close-up of a curved surface with a black arrow pointing to a small rectangular object (no text or symbols visible)

Being towed

Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 55; otherwise, the low-beam headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and windshield wipers may be unavailable. Power steering assistance is not available when the engine is not running. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort. Active steering is not active and it will be necessary to turn the steering wheel further.

Manual transmission

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Automatic transmission

Selector lever in position N. Changing selector lever position, refer to page 58.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/70 km/h and a towing distance of 90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic transmission may be damaged.

Sports automatic transmission with double clutch

Make sure that the parking lock P is not engaged; otherwise, the rear wheels are immobilized.

When using the car wash function, refer to page 210, make sure that after approx. 30 minutes, the parking lock P is automatically engaged and thus immobilizes the rear wheels. In the event of an electrical malfunction or if the vehicle must be towed for more than approx. 20 minutes, unlock the parking lock manually, refer to page 63.

When towing, do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h and a maximum distance traveled of 30 miles/50 km; otherwise, the transmission may be damaged.

BMW recommends transporting the vehicle on a tow truck with a flatbed or towing with the rear axle raised.

Towing methods

Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

With a tow bar

The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may be impossible to maintain control.

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:

Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.
The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.

With a tow rope

When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.

With a tow truck

Manual transmission and automatic transmission:

Diagram showing three types of car loading or parking loads with a diagonal line crossing over each, indicating no load or clearance.

Sports automatic transmission with double clutch:

Diagram showing three types of car loading trucks with diagonal lines indicating no crossing or collision

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.

Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised as this may cause the steering to turn.

Tow-starting

Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possible; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to page 220. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission or Sports automatic transmission with double clutch cannot be tow-started at all.

1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch depressed all the way and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warning flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.

T M Y Z M P D N S U A G I K M U E D E R K Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 129 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Reference

This chapter contains technical data, short commands for the voice activation system and an index that will help you find information most quickly.

Technical data

Engine data

	128i 135i
Displacement cu in/cm ^3 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 6 6
Maximum power output hp 230 300at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,200-5,000

Dimensions

Coupe

All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 35.1 ft/10.7 m
135i: height 55.4 in/1,408 mm

Convertible

104.7 / 2,660 172.2 / 4,373

All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 35.1 ft/10.7 m
135i: height 54.8 in/1,392 mm

Weights

Coupe

		128i 135i
Approved gross weight
▷ with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,134/1,875 4,255/1,930
▷ with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,211/1,910 –
▷ Sports automatic transmis-sion with double clutch	lbs/kg – 4,321/1,960
Load lbs/kg 794/360 794/360
Approved front axle load	lbs/kg	2,028/920	2,116/960
Approved rear axle load	lbs/kg 2,293/1,040 2,293/1,040
Approved roof load capacity	lbs/kg	165/75	165/75
Cargo area capacity	cu ft/liters	13.1/370	13.1/370

Convertible

		128i 135i
Approved gross weight
▷ with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,398/1,995 4,541/2,060
▷ with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,475/2,030 -
▷ Sports automatic transmis-sion with double clutch	lbs/kg - 4,608/2,090
Load lbs/kg 750/340 750/340
Approved front axle load	lbs/kg	2,050/930	2,161/980
Approved rear axle load	lbs/kg 2,467/1,119 2,469/1,120
Approved roof load capacity	lbs/kg --
Cargo area capacity	cu ft/liters	9.1-10.7/260-305	9.1-10.7/260-305

Capacities

Notes

Fuel tank: US gal/liters approx. 14.0/53 Fuel grade: page 193

including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0

Window washer system For more details: page 66

including headlamp washers US qt/liters approx. 6.3/6.0

Short commands for the voice activation system\*

With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu

item is selected. Here are the important short commands for the voice activation system.

Useful short commands

Function Command
Opening a music collection	>Music collection<
Opening the tone control >Tone<
Opening the settings >Settings<
Opening the computer	>Onboard info<
Opening the contacts *	>Contacts<
Displaying the phone book*	>Phonebook<
Opening services*	>Assist<
Opening BMW Assist*	>B M W Assist<
Opening the home address *	>Home address<
Opening destination entry *	>Enter address<
Opening destination guidance *	>Guidance<

CD/Multimedia

CD/DVD drive

Function Command
Playing back a CD	>C D on<
Selecting a CD	>Select C D<
Selecting a CD and track	>C D ... track ...< e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track	>C D track ...< e.g. track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu	>C D and multimedia<
CD and DVD*	>C D<
Displaying entertainment details on the split screen*	>Entertainment details<

Music collection

Function Command
Calling up the current playback	>Current playback<
Opening a music collection	>Music collection<
Playing back a music collection	>Music collection on<
Searching for music; opening the menu	>Music search<
Playing back the most frequently played tracks	>Top fifty<

External devices

Function Command
Opening external devices	>External devices<

Tone control

Function Command

Opening the tone control >Tone<

Radio

FM

Function Command
Calling up the radio >Radio<
Calling up an FM station	>F M<
Opening manual search >Manual<
Selecting the frequency range	>Select frequency<
Calling up a station	>Select station< e.g. W-PLJ

AM

Function Command
Calling up an AM station	>A M<
Opening manual search >Manual<

Satellite radio

Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio	>Satellite radio<
Switching on the satellite radio	>Satellite radio on<
Selecting a satellite radio channel	>Select satellite radio< e.g. channel 2

Presets

Function Command
Opening the stored stations >Presets<
Choosing a stored station	>Select preset<
Selecting a stored station	>Preset ...< e.g. stored station 2

Telephone

Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu >Telephone<
Displaying the phone book >Phonebook<
Redialing >Redial<
Displaying accepted calls	>Received calls<
Dialing a phone number	>Dial number<
Displaying the list of messages	>Messages<
Displaying Bluetooth devices	>Bluetooth<

Navigation

General information

Function Command
Navigation menu	>Navigation<
Opening destination entry	>Enter address<
Entering an address	>Enter address<
Opening destination guidance >Guidance<
Starting destination guidance	>Start guidance<
Ending destination guidance	>Stop guidance<
Opening the home address	>Home address<
Opening the route criteria	>Route preference<
Opening the route	>Route information<
Switching on the voice instructions	>Switch on voice instructions<
Repeating a voice instruction	>Repeat voice instructions<
Switching off the voice instructions	>Switch off voice instructions<
Displaying the address book	>Address book<

Function Command

Displaying the last destinations	>Last destinations
Opening the traffic bulletins	>Traffic Info
Special destinations	>Points of interest

Map

Function Command

Displaying the map >Map<
Map facing north	>Map facing north<
Map in the direction of travel	>Map in direction of travel<
Perspective map	>Map perspective view<
Automatic map scaling*	>Map with automatic scaling<
Changing the scale	>Map scale<

Split screen* settings

Function Command

Split screen	>Switch on splitscreen<
Switching off the split screen	>Turn off split screen<
Adapting the split screen	>Split screen content<
Split screen, current position	>Split screen current position<
Split screen, map facing north	>Split screen map facing north<
Split screen, direction of travel	>Split screen map in direction of travel<
Split screen, perspective	>Split screen perspective<
Automatically scaling the split screen	>Split screen automatic scaling<
Expanded intersection zoom on the split screen	>Splitscreen Exit ramp view<
Split screen scale ... meters*	>Split screen scale ... meters< e.g. split screen scale of 100 meters
Split screen scale ... kilometers*	>Split screen scale ... kilometers< e.g. split screen scale of 5 kilometers
Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins	>Split screen, Traffic conditions<
Split screen, computer	>Split screen on board info<
Split screen, trip computer	>Splitscreen trip computer<

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations

Function Command
Entering a new destination	>Enter address<
Trip list	>Stored trips<

Contacts

Function Command
Opening the contacts >Contacts<
My contacts	>My contacts<
New contact	>New contact<

BMW Assist

Function Command
Opening BMW Assist*	>B M W Assist<
Opening BMW Search*	>B M W Search<

Vehicle information

Function Command
Opening the computer	Onboard info
Opening the trip computer	Trip computer
Opening the vehicle information	Vehicle info
Opening the vehicle status	Vehicle status

Settings

Vehicle

Function Command
Opening the main menu	>Main menu<
Opening the settings >Settings<
Opening the options >Options<
Settings on the Control Display	>Control display<
Opening the time and date settings	>Time and date<
Opening the language and unit settings	>Language and units<
Opening the speed limit settings >Speed<
Opening the light settings >Lighting<
Opening the door lock settings	>Door locks<

Equipment

Function Command

Opening the air conditioning settings >Climate<

Everything from A to Z

Index

A

ABS Antilock Brake System 81

Acceleration assistant, refer to Launch Control 64

Accessories, refer to The individual vehicle 5

Accident, reporting, refer to Emergency Request 219

Activated-charcoal filter 99

Activating BMW Assist 186, 188

Active steering 86

Adaptive light control 92

Additives

- coolant 205

- engine oil 205

Address, entering 121, 127

Address for navigation

- entering 121

Adjusting temperature 97

Airbags 88

- sitting safely 43

- warning lamp 89

Air conditioner 96

Air distribution

- automatic 97

Airing, refer to Ventilation 99

Air outlets, refer to Air vents 96

Air pressure, checking, refer to Tire inflation pressure 194

Air recirculation, refer to Recirculated-air mode 98

Air vents 96

Air volume 98

AKI, refer to Fuel specifications 193

Alarm system 32

- avoiding unintentional alarms 33

- interior motion sensor 33

- switching off an alarm 32

- tilt alarm sensor 33

Albums of music collection 160

ALL program 98

All-season tires, refer to Winter tires 201

AM, waveband 143

Ambient air, refer to Recirculated-air mode 98

Antenna for mobile phone 170

Antifreeze

- coolant 205

- washer fluid 66

Antilock Brake System ABS 81

Anti-theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 32

Anti-theft system 27

Approved axle loads, refer to Weights 229

Approved engine oils 205

Approved gross vehicle weight, refer to Weights 229

Armrest, refer to Center armrest 105

Arrival time

- computer 70

Ashtray 106

Assistance systems, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 81

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 98

Audible instructions, refer to Spoken instructions 132

Audio 140

- controls 140

- switching on/off 140

-tone control 140

-volume 140

Automatic

– air distribution 97

– air volume 97

-cruise control 66

– headlamp control 91

Automatic car washes 209

Automatic climate control 96

Automatic curb monitor 50

Automatic high beams and low beams, refer to High-beam assistant 93

Automatic lamps

– refer to Welcome lamps 91

Automatic recirculated-air control AUC 98

Automatic Service Request 188

Automatic transmission with Steptronic 57

- selector lever lock 58

- shiftlock 58

- towing 221

-tow-starting 221

AUTO program for automatic climate control 97

AUX-IN port 163

Available services 188

Average fuel consumption 70

- setting the units 72

Average speed 70

Avoid highways in navigation 130

Avoiding unintentional alarms 33

Axle loads, refer to Weights 229

B

Backrests, refer to Seats 44

Backrest width adjustment 45

Back seats, refer to Rear seats

- adjusting head restraints 46

Backup lamp, replacing bulb 216

Bag for skis, refer to Ski bag 107

Band-aids, refer to First aid pouch 219

Bar, refer to Tow-starting, towing away 222

Base plate for telephone or mobile phone

– refer to Snap-in adapter 180

Bass, tone setting 140

Battery 217

- charging 218

- disposal 35, 218

-jump-starting 220

-replacing 217

- temporary power failure 218

Battery for mobile phone 181

Battery renewal

- remote control for vehicle 35

Being towed 222

Belts, refer to Safety belts 49

Belt tensioner, refer to Safety belts 49

Beverage holders, refer to Cupholders 105

Blower, refer to Air volume 98

Bluetooth, activating/deactivating 172

BMW

-car shampoo 210

BMW Assist 184

BMW Maintenance System 207

BMW Search 186

Bottle holders, refer to Cupholders 105

Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic Brake Control 81

Brake fluid

– service requirements 72

Brake Force Display 87

Brake lamps

- Brake Force Display 87

- replacing bulb 216

Brake pads, breaking in 112

Brake rotors 114

- brakes 112

- breaking in 112

Brakes

- ABS 81

- BMW Maintenance System 207

- braking safely 114

- breaking in 112

- parking brake 57

- service requirements 72

Brake system 112

- BMW Maintenance System 207

- breaking in 112

- disc brakes 114

Breakdown services, refer to Roadside Assistance 219

Breaking in the clutch 112

Break-in period 112

Bulb changing, refer to Lamps and bulbs 213

Bulbs, changing 213

Button for starting the engine 55

Buttons on the steering wheel 11

C

California Proposition 65 warning 6

Call

-accepting 173

- ending 174

-rejecting 174

Calling, refer to Phone numbers, dialing 174

Calling, refer to Telephone owner's manual

Can holders, refer to Cupholders 105

Capacities 230

Capacity of the cargo area 229

Car battery, refer to Vehicle battery 217

Car care, refer to Care 209

Care 209

– automatic car washes 209

-care products 209

-carpets 212

- CD/DVD drives 212

-chrome parts 211

-convertible top210

- displays 212

- exterior 209

-fine wood parts 212

- headlamps 210

– high-pressure washer 210

- interior 211

- leather 211

– light-alloy wheels 211

- paintwork 211

- plastic parts 212

- rubber seals 211

- safety belts 212

-sensors and cameras 212

- upholstery and cloth trim 211

- washing the car manually 210

-windows 210

Cargo, securing 116

Cargo area

-capacity 229

- Comfort Access 34

– enlarging, refer to Through-loading system 106

– lamp, refer to Interior lamps 95

– lid, refer to Trunk lid 31

– opening from outside 31

Cargo area lid, refer to Trunk lid 31

Cargo area net, refer to Securing cargo 116

Cargo loading 115

-securing cargo 116

-stowing cargo 115

- vehicle 114

Car jack

-jacking points 217

Car key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Car phone

- installation location, refer to Center armrest 105

– refer to separate Owner's Manual

Car phone, refer to Telephone 170

Car radio, refer to Radio 143

Car shampoo 210

Car wash 209

Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 113

CD, audio playback 151

CD changer 151, 155

- controls 140

– fast forward/reverse 153

- filling or emptying the magazine 156

– random play sequence 152

-selecting a track 151

-switching on/off 140

-tone control 140

-volume 140

CD player 151

- controls 140

– fast forward/reverse 153

– random play sequence 152

-selecting a track 151

-switching on/off 140

-tone control 140

- volume 140

Center armrest 105

Center brake lamp, replacing bulb 217

Center console, refer to Around the center console 14

Central key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Central locking

- from inside 30

- from outside 27

Central locking system 27

- Comfort Access 33

Changes, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Changing the language on the Control Display 79

Changing wheels 217

Chassis number, refer to Engine compartment 203

Check Control 76

Checking oil level 203

Child restraint fixing system LATCH 53

Child restraint systems 52

Child seats 52

Chrome parts 211

Chrome polish 211

Cigarette lighter 106

Cleaning headlamps 65

-washer fluid 66

Cleaning your BMW, refer to Care 209

Climate control

– automatic air distribution 97

Clock 68

- 12h/24h mode 75

- setting the time and date 75

- setting time 74

Closing

- from inside 30

– from outside 27

clothes hooks 105

Cold start, refer to Starting the engine 56

Comfort Access 33

-replacing the battery 35

Comfort access, refer to Comfort Access 33

Comfort area, refer to Around the center console 14

Compartment for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 55

Compass 103

Computer 69

– displays on Control Display 70

Computer, refer to iDrive 16

Concierge service 185

Condensation, refer to When the vehicle is parked 114

Condition Based Service CBS 207

Configuring settings, refer to Personal Profile 26

Confirmation signals for locking/unlocking the vehicle 28

Congestion

– refer to Route, bypassing sections 131

Connecting vacuum cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 106

Consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 70

Contacts

-creating 182

Control Center, refer to iDrive 16

Control Display 16

Control Display, refer to iDrive

– switching on/off 19

Controller, refer to iDrive 16

Controls and displays 10

Convenient operation

- windows 28

- windows with Comfort Access 34

– with Comfort Access 34

Convenient starting, refer to Starting the engine 56

Convertible

- rollover protection system 90

-top 38

- wind deflector 41

Convertible top

- convenient opening 28

Convertible top care 210

Coolant 205

-checking level 206

- filling 206

Coolant temperature 69

Cooling, maximum 97

Cooling fluid, refer to Coolant 205

Copyright 2

Corner-illuminating lamps 92

Corner-illuminating lamps, refer to Adaptive light control 92

Cornering lamps, refer to Adaptive light control 92

Country codes DVD 153

Courtesy lamps 95

Criteria for route 130

Cross-hairs in navigation 126

Cruise control 66

Cruising range 70

Cupholders 105

Curb weight, refer to Weights 229

Current fuel consumption 70

Current playback

- external devices 165

– of music collection 160

Customer Relations 187

D

Dashboard, refer to Dashboard 10

Dashboard lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 95

Data, technical 226

- capacities 230

- dimensions 227

- engine 226

- sizes 227

- weights 229

Data memory 208

Data transfer 188

Date

- setting 75

- setting format 76

Daytime running lights, switch positions 92

DBC Dynamic Brake Control 81

Deactivating front passenger airbags 88

Deadlocking, refer to Locking 28

Defect

- door lock 30

– fuel filler flap 192

-glass roof 37

Defogging windows 98

Defrosting the windows 98

Defrosting windows and removing condensation 98

Defrosting windshield, refer to Defrosting windows 98

Defrost position, refer to Defrosting windows 98

Destination, entering by town/ city name 121

Destination address

-entering 121, 127

Destination entry via BMW Assist 125

Destination for navigation

- entering by voice 127

- entering via map 126

- entry 121

- home address 124

- manual entry 121

Destination guidance 130

- bypassing a route section 131

- changing specified route 130

- continuing 130

-starting 130

- voice instructions 132

– volume of voice instructions 132

Differential, breaking in 112

Digital clock 68,74

Digital compass 103

Digital radio, refer to HD Radio 144

Dimensions 227

Directional indicators, refer to Turn signals 64

Direction instructions, refer to Voice instructions 132

Directory for navigation, refer to Address book 123

Displacement, refer to Engine data 226

Display, refer to Control Display 16

Display lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 95

Displays, refer to Instrument cluster 12

Displays and controls 10

Disposal

- of coolant 205

- remote control battery 35

- vehicle battery 218

Distance, refer to Computer 70

Distance remaining to service, refer to Service requirements 72

Distance to destination, refer to Computer 70

Distance warning, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 80

Door key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Door lock 29

Door lock, confirmation signals 28

Doors, emergency operation 30

DOT Quality Grades 198

Draft-free ventilation 99

Drinks holders, refer to Cupholders 105

Drive mode 61

Drive-off assistance, refer to DSC 81

Drive-off assistant 82

Driving dynamics control 62

Driving lamps, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 91

Driving notes 112

Driving off on hills, refer to Drive-off assistant 82

Driving stability control systems 81

Driving through water 114

Driving tips, refer to Driving notes 112

Dry air, refer to Cooling function 98

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 81

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 81

-indicator lamps 81

DVD

– country codes 153

- settings 154

– video playback 153

DVD menu 154

DVD player, refer to CD player 151

DVD video 153

Dynamic Brake Control DBC 81

Dynamic destination guidance 131

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 81

Dynamic Traction Control DTC

-indicator lamps 82

E

EBV Electronic brake-force distribution 81

Eject button, refer to Buttons on the CD/DVD player 140

Electrical defect

- 7-gear sports automatic transmission with double clutch 63

Electrical malfunction

- door lock 30

– fuel filler flap 192

-glass roof 37

Electronic brake-force distribution EBV 81

Electronic oil level check 203

Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 81

Emergency operation, refer to Manual operation

- door lock 30

- fuel filler flap 192

-glass roof 37

- transmission lock, automatic transmission 59

Emergency release, trunk lid 31

Emergency Request 219

Emergency services, refer to Roadside Assistance 219

Energy, saving

– saving fuel 112

Engine

- breaking in 112

-data 226

-speed 226

-starting 56

-starting, Comfort Access 33

- switching off 56

Engine compartment 203

Engine coolant, refer to Coolant 205

Engine oil

- adding 205

- additives 205

- alternative oil grades 205

- approved engine oils 205

– BMW Maintenance System 207

-checking level 203

- intervals between changes, refer to Service requirements 72

Engine output, refer to Engine data 226

Engine speed, refer to Engine data 226

Engine starting, refer to Starting the engine 56

Entering the postal code for navigation 122

Entry map for destination 126

Equalizer, tone setting 141

ESP Electronic Stability Program, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 81

Exhaust system, refer to Hot exhaust system 113

Extended connectivity of the music player in the mobile phone 163

Exterior mirrors 49

-adjusting 49

- automatic dimming feature 51

- automatic heating 50

– folding in and out 50

External devices

-random sequence 165

Eyes

– for tow-starting and towing away 221

– for tying down loads 116

F

Failure messages, refer to Check Control 76

Failure of an electrical consumer 218

False alarm, refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms 33

Fastening safety belts, refer to Safety belts 49

Fastest route for navigation 130

Fast forward

- CD changer 153

- CD player 153

Filter of automatic climate control, refer to Microfilter/activated charcoal filter 99

First aid pouch 219

Fixture for remote control, refer to Ignition lock 55

Flash when locking/unlocking 28

Flat tire

- run-flat tires 200

– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 84

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 82

-indicating a flat tire 83

- initializing the system 83

- system limits 82

Flat tires, refer to Tire condition 199

FM, waveband 143

Fog lamps 94

-indicator lamp 13,94

Footbrake, refer to Braking safely 114

Footwell lamps 95

For your own safety 5

Free memory capacity, music collection 161

Front airbags 88

Front seat setting 44

Frost, removing from windows, refer to Defrosting windows 98

FTM, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 82

Fuel 193

-gauge 69

– high-quality brands 193

- quality 193

– specifications 193

- tank contents, refer to Capacities 230

Fuel clock, refer to Fuel gauge 69

Fuel consumption indicator, refer to Average fuel consumption 70

Fuel consumption statistics, refer to Average fuel consumption 70

Fuel display, refer to Fuel gauge 69

Fuel filler flap 192

– releasing in the event of electrical malfunction 192

Fuses 218

G

Garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 101

Gasoline, refer to Required fuel 193

Gasoline display, refer to Fuel gauge 69

Gas station recommendations 131

Gear change

– with automatic transmission 58

– with manual transmission 57

Gear display, with automatic transmission 58

Gear shifting 62

Gearshift lever 60

- automatic transmission with Steptronic 58

– manual transmission 57

General driving notes 113

Glass roof, electric 36

– closing after electrical malfunction 37

- convenient operation 30

- opening, closing 37

– operation with Comfort Access 34

-pinch protection system 37

- raising 36

- remote control 28

Glove compartment 104

GPS navigation, refer to Navigation system 120

Grills, refer to Air vents 96

Gross vehicle weight, refer to Weights 229

H

Halogen lamps

- replacing bulbs 214

Handbrake, refer to Parking brake 57

Hands-free system, refer to Microphone for hands-free mode 14

Hazard warning flashers 14

HD Radio 144

Head airbags 88

Headlamp control, automatic 91

Headlamp cover 214

Headlamp flasher 64

-indicator lamp 13

Headlamps

-replacing bulbs 214

Head restraints 46

Heated

-seats 48

- steering wheel 51

Heated mirrors 50

Heating

- mirrors 50

- seats 48

- steering wheel 51

Heating, rear window 98

Heating and ventilation 96

Heavy loads, refer to Stowing cargo 115

Height, refer to Dimensions 227

Height adjustment

- steering wheel 51

High-beam assistant 93

High beams 93

-indicator lamp 13

-replacing bulbs 214

High beams and low beams, automatic, refer to High-beam assistant 93

High-pressure washer 209, 210

High water, refer to Driving through water 114

Highways, refer to Route criteria 130

Hills 114

Holders for cups 105

Hood 202

Hot exhaust system 113

Hydraulic brake assist, refer to Dynamic Brake Control 81

Hydroplaning 113

|

IBOC, refer to HD Radio 144

Ice warning, refer to Outside temperature warning 68

Identification marks

- tire coding 198

Idle position 61

iDrive 16

- adjusting brightness 79

– changing date and time 75

- changing language 79

- menu guidance 17

- operating principle 16

- status information 19

Ignition 55

- switched off 56

- switched on 55

Ignition key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 55

Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 55

Ignition lock 55

Imprint 2

Indicator and warning lamps 13

– Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 85

Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 26

Inflation pressure, tires 194

Inflation pressure monitoring, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 84

Initializing

- compass, refer to Calibrating 104

– radio, refer to Station, storing 143

– refer to Setting the time and date 75

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 83

Instructions for navigation system, refer to Voice instructions 132

Instrument cluster 12

Instrument combination, refer to Instrument cluster 12

Instrument lighting 95

Integrated key 26

Integrated universal remote control 101

Interactive map 126

Interior lamps 95

- remote control 28

Interior motion sensor 33

Interior rearview mirror 50

- automatic dimming feature 51

- compass 103

Intermittent mode of the wipers 65

Intersection, entering, navigation 122

iPod, connecting, refer to AUX-IN port 163

iPod, connecting, refer to USB audio interface 163

J

Jacking points 217

Jets, refer to Air vents 96

Joystick, refer to iDrive 16

Jumpering, refer to Jump-starting 220

Jump-starting 220

K

Key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Keyless go, refer to Comfort Access 33

Keyless opening and closing, refer to Comfort Access 33

Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 26

Kickdown 58

Knock control 193

L

Lamps

- adaptive light control 92

- interior lighting 95

Lamps, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 91

Lamps and bulbs, replacing bulbs 213

Lashing eyes, refer to Securing cargo 116

Last destinations 124

LATCH child restraint fixing system 53

Launch Control 64

Leather care 211

LED Light-emitting diodes 213

Length, refer to Dimensions 227

License plate lamp, replacing bulb 217

Light

- instrument lighting 95

– refer to High-beam assistant 93

Light-alloy wheels 211

Light control

– refer to High-beam assistant 93

Light-emitting diodes LED 213

Lighter 106

- socket 106

Lighting

-lamps and bulbs 213

- of instruments 95

– of vehicle, refer to Lamps 91

Light switch 91

Limit, refer to Speed limit 78

Load 115

Load securing equipment, refer to Securing cargo 116

Lock buttons of doors, refer to Locking 30

Locking

- adjusting confirmation signal 28

– from inside 30

– from outside 28

– without remote control, refer to Comfort Access 33

Locking and unlocking doors

– from inside 30

- from outside 27

Low beam control, refer to High-beam assistant 93

Low-beam headlamps 91

- automatic 91

-replacing bulbs 214

Lower back support, refer to Lumbar support 45

Luggage compartment, refer to Cargo area

Luggage rack, refer to Roof-mounted luggage rack 116

Lumbar support 45

M

M+S tires, refer to Winter tires 201

Maintenance, refer to

– BMW Maintenance System 207

- Service booklet

Maintenance system 207

Malfunction warnings, refer to Check Control 76

Manual car wash 210

Manually unlocking parking lock 63

Manual operation

- door lock 30

- fuel filler flap 192

- glass roof 37

- parking lock 63

- transmission lock, automatic transmission 59

Manual operation with automatic transmission 59

Manual transmission 57

Map for navigation

- changing scale 133

- entering destination 126

Map view 132

Maximum cooling 97

Maximum speed

- for winter tires 201

Menus, refer to iDrive 16

Messages 176

Messages from the concierge service 177

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter for automatic climate control 99

Microphone for telephone 14

Mirror dimming feature 51

Mirrors 49

- automatic curb monitor 50

- exterior mirrors 49

- heating 50

- interior rearview mirror 50

Mobile phone

- adjusting volume 173

- connecting, refer to Mobile phone, pairing 170

- operation via iDrive 173

- pairing 170

Mobile phone, installation location, refer to Center armrest 105

Mobile phone, refer to Telephone 170

Mobile phone, refer to the separate Owner's Manual

Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5

Monitor, refer to iDrive 16

Monitoring system for tire pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 82

MP3 player, connecting, refer to AUX-IN port 163

MP3 player, connecting, refer to USB audio interface 163

Multi-channel playback 141

Multifunctional steering wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11

Multifunction switch

– refer to Turn signals/headlamp flasher 64

– refer to Wiper system 65

Music, managing 161

Music collection 158

- backup 162

- deleting 162

– random sequence 161

- restoring 162

Music player, connecting, refer to AUX-IN port 163

Music player, connecting, refer to USB audio interface 163

Music search 159

My Info 177

N

Navigation

– starting destination guidance after entering a destination 123

– storing current position 123

- voice activation 127

Navigation announcements, refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 132

Navigation data 120

Navigation system 120

- address book 123

- bypassing a route section 131

– continuing destination guidance 130

-destinationentry121

– dynamic destination guidance 131

- entering a destination by voice 127

- entering a destination manually 121

– frequently asked questions 137

– gas station recommendations 131

- planning a trip 128

- route list 131

– selecting destination via map 126

– selecting route criteria 130

– special destinations 124

– starting destination guidance 130

- terminating destination guidance 130

- traffic bulletins 133

- voice instructions 132

- volume adjustment 132

Neck support, refer to Head restraints 46

Nets, refer to Storage compartments 105

New tires 200

Next Service indicator, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 207

North-facing map 132

Number of cylinders, refer to Engine data 226

0

OBD socket, refer to Socket for Onboard Diagnosis 208

Octane ratings, refer to Fuel specifications 193

Odometer 68

Oil, refer to Engine oil 203

Oil consumption 203

Oil level 203

Old batteries, refer to Disposal 218

Onboard vehicle tool kit 213

Opening and closing

- Comfort Access 33

- from inside 30

- from outside 27

- using the door lock 29

- using the remote control 27

Opening stored trips 129

Options, selecting for navigation 130

Orientation menu, refer to Start menu 17

Outlets, refer to Ventilation 99

Output, refer to Engine data 226

Outside temperature display 68

- changing unit of measure 72

-in computer 72

Outside temperature warning 68

Overriding selector lever lock 59

Overview

– radio control 140

P

Paintwork care 211

Park assistant, refer to Park Distance Control 80

Park Distance Control PDC 80

Parked car ventilation 99

– preselecting switch-on times 100

- switching on and off directly 99

Parking

- vehicle 56

Parking aid, refer to Park Distance Control PDC 80

Parking brake 57

-indicator lamp 57

Parking lamps/low beams 91

- replacing bulbs 214

Parts and accessories, refer to The individual vehicle 5

Passenger-side mirror tilt function 50

Pathway lighting 92

Personal Profile 26

Phone book 173

Phone numbers

-dialing 174

Pinch protection system

-glass roof,electric 37

- windows 36

Playing music 159

Polish 211

Pollen, refer to Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter 99

Power windows 35

Power windows, refer to Windows 35

Pressure, tires 194

Pressure monitoring of tires, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 82

Pressure monitoring of tires, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 84

Programmable buttons on the steering wheel 11

Programmable memory keys 20

Protection function, refer to Pinch protection system

-glass roof,electric 37

- windows 36

Providing medical assistance, refer to First add pouch 219

Puncture

- Flat Tire Monitor 82

R

Radio

- controls 140

-HD Radio 144

- satellite radio 146

-selecting waveband 143

-storing stations 143

– switching on/off 140

-tone control 140

- volume 140

Radio position, refer to Radio readiness 55

Radio readiness 55

- switched off 56

- switched on 55

Rain sensor 65

Random sequence

- external devices 165

– music collection 161

Reading lamps 95

Rear lamps, refer to Tail lamps 216

Rear seats

- adjusting head restraints 46

– folding down backrests 106

Rearview mirror, refer to Mirrors 49

Rear window defroster 98

Receiving level of mobile phone, refer to Status information 19

Reception

- quality 144

– radio station 144

Recirculated-air mode 98

Recirculation of air, refer to Recirculated-air mode 98

Reflectors, refer to Tail lamps 216

Refueling 192

Releasing

- hood 202

Remaining distance, refer to Computer 70

Remaining distance, refer to Cruising range 70

Remote control 26

-battery renewal 35

- Comfort Access 33

- garage door opener 101

– malfunctions 29, 34

- removing from the ignition lock 55

- service data 207

- trunk lid 28

Remote control key, refer to Integrated key/remote control 26

Replacement fuses, refer to Fuses 218

Replacement remote control 26

Replacing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 213

Replacing tires, refer to New wheels and tires 200

Reporting safety defects 7

Reserve warning, refer to Fuel gauge 69

Reservoir for washer systems 66

Reset, refer to Resetting tone settings 142

Restraint systems, refer to Safety belts 49

Restraint systems for children 52

Retreaded tires 200

Reverse

- CD changer 153

- CD player 153

Reverse gear 61

– automatic transmission with Steptronic 58

– manual transmission 57

Road map 132

Roadside

Assistance 185, 219

Roadside parking lamps 93

- replacing bulbs 214

Roadworthiness test, refer to Service requirements 72

Rollover protection system, Convertible 90

- resetting 90

Roof load capacity 229

Roof-mounted luggage rack 116

Rope, refer to Tow-starting, towing away 222

Rotary/pushbutton control, refer to Controller 16

Route 130, 131

- bypassing sections 131

- changing 130, 131

- changing criteria 130

– displaying streets or towns/cities 131

- map view 132

-selecting 130

Route instructions, refer to Destination guidance through voice instructions 132

Route map, refer to Map view 132

Route section, changing 131

Route selection 130

RSC Runflat System Component, refer to Run- flat tires 200

Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-flat tires 200

Run-flat tires 200, 201

- flat tire 83

– Inflation pressure 194

- new tires 200

– remaining driving distance, refer to Indication of a flat tire 83

- tire replacement 200

Runflat tyres, refer to Run-flat tires 200

S

Safety-belt height adjustment 49

Safety belts 49

- damage 49

-indicator lamp 49

- reminder 49

– sitting safely 43

Safety systems

-airbags 88

- Antilock Brake System ABS 81

– Dynamic Stability Control DSC 81

- rollover protection system, Convertible 90

– safety belts 49

Safety tires, refer to Run-flat tires 200

Satellite radio 146

- enabling or unsubscribing from a channel 146

-favorites 148

-selecting channel 147

-storing channel 147

- timeshift 148

- Traffic Jump 149

Saving fuel 112

Screen, refer to iDrive 16

Screw thread for tow fitting 221

SDARS, refer to Satellite radio 146

Seat and mirror memory 48

Seat belt reminder, refer to "Fasten safety belts" reminder 49

Seats 44

- heating 48

– sitting safely 43

Securing cargo 108, 109

Selecting a detour 136

Selecting new scale for navigation 133

Selector lever, automatic transmission with Steptronic 58

Selector lever positions 60

Service, refer to Roadside Assistance 219

Service car, refer to Roadside Assistance 219

Service data in remote control 207

Service Interval Display, refer to Condition Based Service CBS 207

Service Request 187

Service requirements 72

Service status 188

Settings

-clock, 12h/24h format 75

-date format 76

- DVD 154

- language 79

Settings for the map view 133

Setting times, refer to Preselecting switch-on times 100

Shifting 62

- 7-gear sports automatic transmission with double clutch 61

Shifting gears with automatic transmission with Steptronic 59

Shift into a drive position, refer to Selector lever positions 60

Shiftlock, refer to Changing selector lever positions 58

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 62

Short commands for the voice activation system 231

Short route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 130

Shuffled, refer to Random – CD changer 152

- CD player 152

Side airbags 88

Side windows, refer to Windows 35

Signal horn, refer to Horn 10

Sitting safely 43

-airbags 43

- safety belt 43

Ski bag 107

Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to Glass roof, electric 36

Slot for remote control 55

Smokers' package, refer to Ashtray 106

Snap-in adapter

- inserting/removing 180

-use 170

Snap-in adapter, refer to Center armrest 105

Snow chains 201

Socket, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 106

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis OBD 208

Sound, adjusting during audio playback, refer to Tone control 140

Sound output for entertainment on/off 140

Spare fuses 218

Special destinations 124

Special destinations, displaying 126

Special destinations, entering by name 126

Special oils, refer to Approved engine oils 205

Specified engine oils, refer to Approved engine oils 205

Speed

- for winter tires 201

Speed display, refer to Speedometer 12

Speed limit warning, refer to Speed limit 78

Speedometer 12

Speed Volume 141

Split screen content, refer to Display for split screen content, selecting 20

Sport program, automatic transmission with Steptronic 59

Sport program with 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch 61

Sports automatic transmission with double clutch 60

– driving dynamics control 62

– idle position 61

- kick-down 61

- Launch Control 64

– manually unlocking parking lock 63

- reverse gear 61

Spray nozzles, refer to Windshield washer nozzles 66

Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 81

Start/stop button 55

- starting the engine 56

- switching off the engine 56

Starting, refer to Starting the engine 56

Starting assistance, refer to Jump-starting 220

Starting the engine

-start/stop button 55

Start menu 17

State/province, for navigation 121

Station, selecting

– radio 143

Status of this Owner's Manual at time of printing 5

Steam jet 209, 210

Steering wheel 51

- adjustment 51

- buttons on steering wheel 11

- heating 51

- shift paddles 62

Steering wheel shift paddles, refer to Shift paddles 62

Steering with variable ratio, refer to Active steering 86

Steptronic, refer to Automatic transmission with Steptronic 57

Storage 212

Storage compartment package 105

Storage compartments 105

Storing

- seat position, refer to Seat and mirror memory 48

– telephone numbers, refer to separate Owner's Manual

Storing a destination in the address book 123

Storing music 158

Storing tires 201

Stowage, refer to Storage compartments 105

Street, entering, navigation 122

Summer tires, refer to Wheels and tires 194

Surround 141

SVCD 153

SW, waveband 143

Switches, refer to Dashboard 10

Switching off

- engine 56

Switching off the engine

-start/stop button 55

Switching on

- audio 140

- CD changer 140

- CD player 140

- radio 140

Switching the cooling function on and off 98

Switch-on times of parked car ventilation, preselecting 100

Symbols 4

- status information 19

T

Tachometer 68

Tailgate, refer to Trunk lid 31

Tail lamp, refer to Tail lamps 216

- replacing bulb 216

Tail lamps 216

-replacing bulb 216

Tank contents, refer to Capacities 230

Technical changes 5

Technical data 226

Telephone 170

- voice commands 177

Telephone, installation location, refer to Center armrest 105

Telephone, refer to separate Owner's Manual

TeleService 185

TeleService Diagnosis 186

TeleService Help 186

Temperature display

- outside temperature 68

- outside temperature warning 68

- setting the units 72

Tempomat, refer to Cruise control 66

Thigh support 44

Third brake lamp, refer to Center brake lamp 217

Three-point safety belt 49

Through-loading system 106

Tilt alarm sensor 33

Tilt function, passenger-side mirror 50

Timer, refer to Preselecting switch-on times 100

Tire inflation pressure 194

- loss 83, 84

Tire pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 82

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 84

- resetting the system 85

– system limitations 84

- warning lamp 85

Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 83

Tire Quality Grading 198

Tires

- age 198

- air loss 85

- breaking in 112

– changing, refer to Changing wheels 217

- condition 199

- damage 199

– inflation pressure 194

- labels 198

– minimum tread depth 199

- new tires 200

– pressure monitoring, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 82

– pressure monitoring, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 84

- puncture 83

- retreaded 200

-size 198

- wear indicators, refer to Minimum tread depth 199

- winter tires 201

TMC station, refer to Traffic bulletins 133

Tone

– control 140

-middle setting 142

Tools, refer to Onboard vehicle tool kit 213

Top 50 of music collection 160

Torque, refer to Engine data 226

Tow bar 222

Tow fitting 221

Tow fittings for tow-starting and towing away 221

Towing 221

– car with automatic transmission 221

-methods 222

– with 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch 222

Towing and tow-starting 221

Town/city, for navigation 121

Tow rope 222

Tow-starting 221

TPM, refer to Tire Pressure Monitor 84

Track

-selecting on CD 151

Traction control, refer to Dynamic Stability Control DSC 81

Traffic bulletins

- categories 135

Traffic bulletins, filtering 135

Traffic bulletins for navigation 133

– display in map view 135

– during destination guidance 135

Traffic jam

– displaying traffic bulletins 133

Transmission

- 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with double clutch 60

- automatic transmission with Steptronic 57

– idle position 61

- Launch Control 64

– manually unlocking parking lock 63

– manual transmission 57

- reverse gear 61

Transporting children safely 52

Transport securing devices, refer to Securing cargo 116

Tread depth, refer to Minimum tire tread 199

Trip, deleting 129

Trip, storing 128

Trip-distance counter, refer to Trip odometer 68

Triple turn signal activation 64

Trip odometer 68

Trips, changing 129

Trunk, refer to Cargo area

Trunk lid 31

- Comfort Access 34

– emergency release 31

- opening from outside 31

- unlocking with remote control 28

Turning circle, refer to Dimensions 227

Turn signals 64

-indicator lamp 12

-replacing bulbs 215

– triple turn signal 64

Tying down loads, refer to Cargo loading 116

U

Underbody protection, refer to Caring for your vehicle 209

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/UTQR 198

Units

– average fuel consumption 72

Units of measure

- temperature 72

Universal garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 101

Unlatching, refer to Unlocking 27

Unlocking

– from inside 30

- from outside 27

- trunk lid 34

– without remote control, refer to Comfort Access 33

Unlocking without a key, refer to Comfort Access 33

Updating the navigation data 120

USB audio interface 163

V

VCD 153

Vehicle

-battery 217

- breaking in 112

- cargo loading 114

– decommissioning, refer to Vehicle storage 212

-dimensions 227

– Identification Number, refer to Engine compartment 203

- parking 56

- weight 229

Vehicle jack 217

Vehicle storage 212

Ventilation 99

-draft-free 99

Ventilation when parked, refer to Parked car ventilation 99

Vents, refer to Ventilation 99

Video menu 153

Video playback 153

Voice, refer to Destination guidance through voice instructions 132

Voice-activated phone book 179

Voice commands

- overview 22

- short commands 231

- telephone 177

Voice instructions from navigation system 132

- repeating 132

- switching on/off 132

-volume 132

Volume 140

– audio sources 140

– fuel tank, refer to Capacities 230

- mobile phone 173

- voice instructions 132

Volume balance, tone setting 141

W

Warning and indicator lamps 13

Warning messages, refer to Check Control 76

Warning triangle 220

Washer fluid 66

– content of the reservoir 66

Washer fluid filler neck 66

Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 106

Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 114

Water penetration 209, 210

Waveband with the radio 143

Wear indicators in tires, refer to Minimum tread depth 199

Weights 229

Welcome lamps 91

Wheelbase, refer to Dimensions 227

Wheels, new 200

Wheels and tires 194

Width, refer to Dimensions 227

Windows 35

- convenient operation 28

– convenient operation with Comfort Access 34

- opening, closing 35

– pinch protection system 36

Window washer system 65

Windshield

- cleaning 65

– defrosting and removing condensation 98

Windshield wash

– filling capacity, reservoir 230

Windshield washer reservoir, refer to Washer fluid filler neck 66

Windshield washer system

- spray nozzles 66

- washer fluid 66

Windshield wiper blades, changing 213

Windshield wipers, refer to Wiper system 65

Winter tires 201

- setting speed limit 78

- storage 201

Wiper blade replacement 213

Wiper system 65

Word-matching principle for navigation 129

Wrench/screwdriver, refer to Onboard vehicle tool kit 213

X

Xenon lamps

- replacing bulb 214

More about BMW bmwusa.com The Ultimate Driving Machine

More about BMW

bmwusa.com

The Ultimate Driving Machine